WO2024016977A1 - Information indication method and apparatus, and readable storage medium - Google Patents

Information indication method and apparatus, and readable storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024016977A1
WO2024016977A1 PCT/CN2023/103385 CN2023103385W WO2024016977A1 WO 2024016977 A1 WO2024016977 A1 WO 2024016977A1 CN 2023103385 W CN2023103385 W CN 2023103385W WO 2024016977 A1 WO2024016977 A1 WO 2024016977A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
indication information
combination
index
dmrs port
value
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/103385
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
高翔
刘显达
刘鹍鹏
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024016977A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024016977A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to an information indication method, device and readable storage medium.
  • the sending behavior of the terminal device is scheduled by the network device.
  • the network device can notify the terminal device through the indication information of the number of transmission streams (also called the number of transmission layers, the number of spatial layers or ranks) for sending uplink data, the transmitted precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) index, and the corresponding Dedicated demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port index.
  • the TPMI index is used to identify the precoding matrix used for uplink transmission.
  • the DMRS port index is used to identify the DMRS port.
  • a DMRS port (DMRS port) corresponds to a spatial layer. For multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission with a transmission layer number of R, the number of DMRS ports required is R.
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output
  • rank 4 layers
  • the maximum number of transmission layers (rank) that a terminal device with more than 4 antennas can support is also greater than 4.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports and the indication of the DMRS port index, such as supporting the transmission layer number of 8 antenna ports. (Maximum 8 layers) and combined indication of TPMI index and indication of DMRS port index of 8 antenna ports, and can reduce indication overhead.
  • this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending first indication information and second indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination.
  • the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination, for example, the second indication information indicates The number of DMRS port indexes is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
  • This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. It can not only support the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI greater than 4 antenna ports (such as 8 antenna ports)
  • This application also encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, using different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers. It can not only support more than 4 antenna ports (such as 8 antennas) There is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
  • the present application provides an information indication method.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives first indication information and second indication information, and according to the value of the second indication information, selects a plurality of transmission layer numbers and TPMI indexes according to the value of the second indication information. Determine a combination within the combination.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS indicated by the second indication information The port index is associated with the first combination.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the first combination; when the second indication information is a value in the second set , the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the specific (or Talk about the unique) rank value and DMRS port index, and further determine the TPMI index corresponding to the rank value.
  • it can also support uplink transmission of greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the number of transmission layers in the above-mentioned first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • One of 6,7,8. there is a corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • the DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have a corresponding relationship are encoded in a table, and different values are used to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different ranks; not only can the number of transmission layers of 8 antenna ports be supported (there are 1 layer to The combined indication of layer 8) and TPMI index and the DMRS port index indication of 8-antenna ports can also reduce the indication overhead without affecting compatibility.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information are carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields in DCI signaling, used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI corresponding to the number of transmission layers.
  • the second indication information may be the antenna port (antenna port) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the communication device includes means for performing a method in the first aspect or in any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the communication device includes means for performing the method of the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • a transceiver unit and a processing unit For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below.
  • the beneficial effects of the above third aspect to the fourth aspect reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect, and will not be described again here.
  • this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending first indication information and third indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the third indication information indicates one combination among the plurality of combinations.
  • This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and uses the third indication information to indicate which of the multiple combinations the network device allocates to the terminal device; It can not only support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing the indication overhead, but also support uplink transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the above multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination of the plurality of combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled, and the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination by indicating that both of the two codewords are enabled.
  • the second combination of many.
  • the third indication information is a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) word in DCI signaling.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the third indication information is an MCS field and a redundancy version field.
  • the value of the MCS field and the redundancy version field corresponding to a codeword can be a preset value or a special value to indicate that the codeword (codeword) is not enabled (disabled). It can be understood that the DCI signaling includes the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field respectively corresponding to the two codewords.
  • the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate that the codeword (codeword) has no is enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled).
  • the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index
  • the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
  • the above method further includes: the network device sends second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination of the above multiple combinations, for example, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is The number is the same as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) in the first combination; when the value of the second indication information is the value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the DMRS port index in the above multiple combinations.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
  • This application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, and uses different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers. It can not only support DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports. Indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
  • the present application provides an information indication method.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives first indication information and third indication information, and according to the third indication information, selects from multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. Decide on a combination.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the third indication information indicates one combination among the plurality of combinations.
  • the terminal device of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the unique rank value and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values according to the indication of the third indication information.
  • the TPMI index corresponding to the rank value It not only supports the combined indication of the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing the indication overhead, but also supports uplink transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the above multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the terminal device determines a combination from multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index according to the third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines a combination from The first combination is determined from the multiple combinations; when the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines the second combination from the multiple combinations.
  • the third indication information is one or more of the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version field.
  • the DCI signaling includes the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field respectively corresponding to the two codewords.
  • the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate that the codeword (codeword) has no is enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled).
  • the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index
  • the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
  • the above method further includes: the terminal device receiving second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination of the above multiple combinations, for example, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is The number is the same as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) in the first combination; when the value of the second indication information is the value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the DMRS port index in the above multiple combinations.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
  • the number of transmission layers in the above first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • the number of transport layers in the first combination and the number of transport layers in the second combination are stored in the corresponding relationship.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the first indication information may be the precoding information and layer number field in DCI signaling, used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number (ie, rank) and the TPMI index corresponding to the transmission layer number.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the fifth aspect or any possible implementation of the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the fifth aspect or any possible implementation of the fifth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the sixth aspect or any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the sixth aspect or any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • a transceiver unit and a processing unit For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below.
  • the beneficial effects of the above seventh to eighth aspects reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing fifth and sixth aspects, and will not be described again here.
  • this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fourth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the fourth indication information has at least a second value, the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, and each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index.
  • the third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • This application makes the fourth indication information have at least one value, which value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups (each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index), and instructs the network device to allocate to the terminal device through the third indication information.
  • Which DMRS port index group is among these multiple DMRS port index groups ? Not only can it support DMRS port index indications greater than 4 antenna ports, there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, and it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and can reduce
  • the redundancy indication bit can also support uplink transmission greater than layer 4, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information indicates the first DMRS port index group among the above-mentioned multiple DMRS port index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled.
  • the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
  • the above method further includes: the network device sends first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups
  • the second combination is associated with the second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the present application provides an information indication method.
  • the method includes: a terminal device receiving fourth indication information and third indication information, and indexing from multiple DMRS ports indicated by the fourth indication information according to the third indication information. Determine a DMRS port index group in the group.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the fourth indication information has at least a second value, the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, and each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index.
  • the third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the terminal equipment of the present application determines one or more DMRS port index groups through the value of the fourth indication information, and then determines a DMRS port index group according to the indication of the third indication information. Not only can it support DMRS port index indication for more than 4 antenna ports, there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and it can reduce redundant indication bits. It can also support more than 4 antenna ports. layer of uplink transmission, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group.
  • the terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups indicated by the fourth indication information according to the third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords uses When enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups; when the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups. Determine the second DMRS port index group.
  • the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
  • the above method further includes: the terminal device receives the first indication information, and according to the above third indication information, obtains the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index indicated by the first indication information. Determine one combination among multiple combinations.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index.
  • a transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination.
  • the plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups
  • the second combination is associated with the second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the terminal device determines the first combination from the multiple combinations; when the above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled. When enabled, the terminal device determines the second combination from the multiple combinations.
  • This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and uses the third indication information to indicate which of the multiple combinations the network device allocates to the terminal device; It can support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing indication overhead.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • One of 6,7,8. there is a corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • the above fourth indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the fourth indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the ninth aspect or any possible implementation of the ninth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the ninth aspect or any possible implementation of the ninth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the tenth aspect or any possible implementation of the tenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the tenth aspect or any possible implementation of the tenth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • a transceiver unit and a processing unit For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below.
  • the beneficial effects of the above eleventh to twelfth aspects reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing ninth and tenth aspects, and will not be described again here.
  • the present application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fifth indication information and second indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates a plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • Each SRS resource The index group includes at least one SRS resource index.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. number of layers (i.e. rank);
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information The same as the second transmission layer number (i.e. rank).
  • This application allows the fifth indication information to have at least one value, which indicates multiple SRS resource index groups (each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index). It can not only support the SRS resource index indication of 8 antenna ports, but also support the maximum 8-layer non-codebook transmission, thereby improving transmission performance; and compared with the way in which a value indicates an SRS resource index group, the indication overhead is also reduced.
  • This application also encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, using different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers, which can not only support DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports Indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
  • the present application provides an information indication method.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives fifth indication information and second indication information, and according to the value of the second indication information, obtains the information indicated by the fifth indication information. Determine one SRS resource index group among SRS resource index groups.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the second indication information is a value in the first set
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of layers is the same; when the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the DMRS port indicated by the second indication information
  • the number of indexes is the same as the number of second transport layers (ie, rank).
  • the terminal equipment of this application determines one or more SRS resource index groups through the value of the fifth indication information, and then determines a specific (or unique) SRS resource index group based on the value of the second indication information; it can support more than 4 SRS resource index indication of each SRS resource, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the number of the first transmission layers is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of the second transmission layers is 5, 6, or 7. , one of 8.
  • the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8.
  • the second transmission layer number is 5; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6; when the first transmission layer number is 3, The second transmission layer number is 7; when the first transmission layer number is 4, the second transmission layer number is 8.
  • the number of the first transmission layer is 1, the number of the second transmission layer is 8; when the number of the first transmission layer is 2, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7.
  • the number of the second transmission layer is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5.
  • the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in DCI signaling.
  • the fifth indication information may be the SRS resource indicator (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index;
  • the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling. , used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is used to perform the method in the thirteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the thirteenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the thirteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the thirteenth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is used to perform the method in the fourteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the fourteenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the fourteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the fourteenth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • a transceiver unit and a processing unit For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below.
  • the beneficial effects of the fifteenth to sixteenth aspects mentioned above reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the thirteenth and fourteenth aspects mentioned above, and will not be described again here.
  • this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fifth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index.
  • the third indication information indicates an SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • This application allows the fifth indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups (each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index), and indicates which SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups the network device allocates to the terminal device through the third indication information; not only can it support SRS resource index indications greater than 4 antenna ports, Supports non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance; and compared with the method of indicating an SRS resource index group with a value, the indication overhead is also reduced.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information indicates the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled.
  • the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
  • the above method further includes: the network device sends second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of transmission layers is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the second indication information
  • the number of indicated DMRS port indexes is the same as the second transmission layer number (ie, rank).
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
  • This application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, uses different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers, and can support the indication of DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports. , there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
  • the present application provides an information indication method.
  • the method includes: a terminal device receiving fifth indication information and third indication information, and according to the third indication information, selecting multiple SRSs indicated by the fifth indication information. Determine an SRS resource index group in the resource index group.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index.
  • the third indication information indicates an SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • the terminal equipment of this application determines one or more SRS resource index groups through the value of the fifth indication information, and then determines an SRS resource index group according to the indication of the third indication information; it can support SRS resource index indications of more than 4 antenna ports. , supports non-codebook transmission greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups indicated by the fifth indication information according to the above third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords uses When enabled, the terminal equipment determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups; when the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal equipment determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups. Determine the second SRS resource index group.
  • the above method further includes: the terminal device receiving second indication information.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of transmission layers is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the second indication information
  • the number of indicated DMRS port indexes is the same as the second transmission layer number (ie, rank).
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
  • the number of the above-mentioned first transmission layers is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of the above-mentioned second transmission layers is 5, 6, or 7 , one of 8.
  • the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8.
  • the first transport layer number is 1, the second transport layer number is 5; when the first transport layer number is 2, the second transport layer number is 6; when the first transport layer When the number is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 8.
  • the number of the first transmission layer is 1, the number of the second transmission layer is 8; when the number of the first transmission layer is 2, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7.
  • the number of the second transmission layer is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5.
  • the fifth indication information is carried in DCI signaling.
  • the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is configured to perform the method in the seventeenth aspect or any possible implementation of the seventeenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the seventeenth aspect or any possible implementation of the seventeenth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein.
  • the communication device is used to perform the method in the eighteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the eighteenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the eighteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the eighteenth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • a transceiver unit and a processing unit For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below.
  • the beneficial effects of the nineteenth to twentieth aspects please refer to the relevant descriptions of the seventeenth and eighteenth aspects, and will not be described again here.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication device includes a processor for executing the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, and the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect. aspect, the seventeenth aspect above, or the method shown in any possible implementation of any one of the aspects.
  • the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory.
  • the memory is located outside the above-mentioned communication device.
  • the memory is located within the above-mentioned communication device.
  • processor and the memory can also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory can also be integrated together.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver is used to send indication information.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a processor for executing the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, and the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect. aspect, the eighteenth aspect above, or the method shown in any possible implementation of any one of the aspects.
  • the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory.
  • the memory is located outside the above-mentioned communication device.
  • the memory is located within the above-mentioned communication device.
  • processor and the memory can also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory can also be integrated together.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver is used to receive indication information.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit is coupled to the interface.
  • the logic circuit is used to generate first indication information and second indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • An indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination; the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index;
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port The index is associated with the first combination.
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination; an interface is used to output the first indication information and the second indication. information.
  • the logic circuit is used to generate first indication information and third indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and the combination of the transmission precoding matrix indicating TPMI index.
  • the number of transmission layers and the TPMI Corresponding to the index, the first indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index; the third indication information indicates one of the multiple combinations; the interface is used for output the first instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the logic circuit is used to generate fourth indication information and third indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference Signal DMRS port index
  • the fourth indication information has at least a second value
  • the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups
  • each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index
  • the third indication information indicates the multiple A DMRS port index group in the DMRS port index group
  • an interface used to output the fourth indication information and the third indication information.
  • the logic circuit is used to generate fifth indication information and second indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value, and the first The value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets One of the plurality of sets at least includes a first set and a second set.
  • the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number; wherein the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group, and the first SRS resource The number of SRS resource indexes included in the index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer; the interface is used to output the fifth indication. information and the second instruction information.
  • the logic circuit is used to generate fifth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value, and the first The value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the third indication information indicates one SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups; the interface is used to output the third five instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the present application provides another communication device.
  • the communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit is coupled to the interface.
  • the interface is used to input first indication information and second indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index.
  • the number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the first The indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index;
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index Associated with the first combination when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination; a logic circuit configured to select from multiple Determine a combination within the combination.
  • the interface is used to input first indication information and third indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and the combination of the transmission precoding matrix indication TPMI index.
  • the first indication information at least has a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index; the logic circuit is used to determine one combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
  • the interface is used to input fourth indication information and third indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index
  • the fourth indication information has at least a second value
  • the second The value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each DMRS port index group including at least one DMRS port index
  • the logic circuit is used to determine a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the third indication information.
  • the interface is used to input fifth indication information and second indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value Indicate multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index;
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets One, the plurality of sets at least include a first set and a second set.
  • the second indication information is a value in the first set
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number; wherein the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group, and the first SRS resource index The number of SRS resource indexes included in the group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer; the logic circuit is used to perform the operation according to the second indication information.
  • the value determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
  • the interface is used to input fifth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value Indicate multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the logic circuit is used to determine an SRS resource index group from the multiple SRS resource index groups according to the third indication information.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, The above-mentioned ninth aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, and above The method shown in the seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any aspect therein, is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, and the above-mentioned The method shown in the tenth aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code.
  • the computer program product When run on a computer, the computer program product enables the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, and the above-mentioned ninth aspect.
  • the method shown in the aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code.
  • the computer program product When run on a computer, the computer program product enables the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, and the above-mentioned tenth aspect.
  • the method shown in the aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on a computer, the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, and the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect
  • the method shown in any aspect, or any possible implementation of any of the aspects, is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on a computer, the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, and the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect , or the method shown in any possible implementation of either aspect is executed.
  • inventions of the present application provide a wireless communication system.
  • the wireless communication system includes a network device and a terminal device.
  • the network device is configured to perform the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, The method shown in the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects, the terminal device is used to execute the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, The method shown in the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a simplified structural diagram of a UE and a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the non-codebook uplink transmission process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of the first information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a second flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a third flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a fifth flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • “At least one of the following” or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
  • At least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c; a and b; a and c; b and c; or a, b, and c.
  • a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • At the same time in this application can be understood as at the same point in time, within a period of time, or within the same cycle. Specifically, it can be understood based on the context.
  • system and “network” are used interchangeably herein.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined based on A.
  • determining B based on A does not mean determining B only based on A.
  • B can also be determined based on A and/or other information.
  • RAT radio access technology
  • LTE longterm evolution
  • WiMAX wireless access technology
  • 5G fifth generation
  • LTE new generation wireless access technology
  • NR new radio access technology
  • the system can also be called 4.5G communication system
  • a network integrating multiple systems, the Internet of Things system, the Internet of Vehicles system, etc.; of course it can also be a future communication system, such as the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) or even the seventh generation (7th generation, 7G) system, etc.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes one or more network devices (base stations in Figure 1) and one or more terminal devices (UEs in Figure 1).
  • wireless communication can be carried out between terminal equipment and network equipment.
  • One terminal equipment can perform uplink transmission with one network equipment or with multiple network equipment at the same time.
  • One network equipment can also perform uplink transmission with one terminal equipment or with multiple terminal equipment at the same time.
  • Downstream transmission For uplink transmission, the terminal device can be configured with one or more antennas for sending and receiving data/information; the network equipment can be configured with multiple antennas for sending and receiving data/information.
  • network equipment and terminal equipment may also include multiple components related to data/information transmission and reception (eg, processors, modulators, multiplexers, demodulators or demultiplexers, etc.).
  • Figure 1 is only a schematic diagram, and the communication system may also include other equipment, such as core network equipment, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment, etc., which are not shown in Figure 1 .
  • the network equipment in this embodiment of the present application includes access network equipment, such as a base station (BS).
  • Access network equipment may be equipment that provides access to terminals, and may include wireless access network (radio access network, RAN) equipment and access node (access node, AN) equipment.
  • RAN equipment is mainly wireless network equipment in the 3GPP network, and AN equipment can be non-3GPP-defined access network equipment.
  • RAN equipment is mainly responsible for wireless resource management, quality of service (QoS) management, data compression and encryption on the air interface side.
  • RAN equipment can include various forms of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, balloon stations, etc.
  • network equipment can be called: RAN or next-generation Node base station (gNB), evolved Node B (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), network equipment control Controller (base station controller, BSC), network equipment transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home network equipment (for example, home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transceiver node (transmission and reception point, TRP), transmission point (TP) in the wireless fidelity (WIFI) system etc.; or one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) of antenna panels of network equipment in a 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device; it may also be a device that can support the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, a communication module, or a modem, etc.
  • the device Can be installed on network equipment.
  • the device for realizing the functions of the network device is a network device, and the network device is a base station. Examples are provided to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. Base stations can support networks with the same or different access technologies. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
  • gNBs or transmission points may include centralized units (CUs), DUs, etc.
  • the gNB or transmission point may also include a radio unit (RU).
  • CU implements part of the functions of gNB or transmission point
  • DU implements part of the functions of gNB or transmission point.
  • CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer Function
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • DU implements the functions of wireless link control (radio link control, RLC), media access control (media access control, MAC) and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • the network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the network device can also be an auxiliary communication device, such as a satellite.
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be called a terminal, user equipment (user equipment, UE), customer premise equipment (CPE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal ( mobile terminal (MT), access terminal equipment, vehicle terminal, industrial control terminal, UE unit, UE station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile device, UE agent or UE device, etc.
  • Terminal equipment is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal device can be a mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer (Pad), computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality (VR) terminal device, augmented reality (AR) terminal device, industrial control (industrial control) ), wireless terminals in vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, wireless terminals in driverless driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, and wireless terminals in transportation safety , wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wearable terminal devices, etc.
  • Terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile.
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system, a communication module, or a modem, etc., and the device may be installed in the terminal.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the device for realizing the function of the terminal is a terminal, and the terminal is a UE as an example to describe the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the terminal equipment.
  • the UE can also be used as a base station.
  • the UE can act as a scheduling entity between UEs in vehicle-to-everything (V2X), device-to-device (D2D) or peer-to-peer (P2P), etc. Provides sidelink signals.
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • D2D device-to-device
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • the UE can also be used to act as a relay node.
  • the UE can act as a relay device or an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node to provide wireless backhaul services for terminal devices.
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul
  • wireless communication may also be referred to as “communication”
  • communication may also be described as “data transmission”, “information transmission” or “transmission”.
  • Figure 2 is a simplified structural diagram of a UE and a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 only shows the main components in the base station 110 and the UE 120.
  • the structures of the base station and the UE may have more components than those shown in Figure 2, or may have fewer components than those shown in Figure 2, or they may Contains only the parts shown in Figure 2.
  • Base station 110 includes an interface 111 and a processor 112.
  • Processor 112 may optionally store programs 114 .
  • Base station 110 optionally includes memory 113.
  • Memory 113 may optionally store programs 115 .
  • UE 120 includes interface 121 and processor 122.
  • Processor 122 may optionally store programs 124.
  • UE 120 optionally includes memory 123.
  • Memory 123 may optionally store programs 125 .
  • These components work together to provide the various functionality described in this application.
  • processor 112 and interface 111 work together to provide a wireless connection between base station 110 and UE 120.
  • the processor 122 and the interface 121 work together to implement downlink transmission and/or uplink transmission of the UE 120.
  • a processor may include one or more processors and be implemented as a combination of computing devices.
  • the processor may each include one or more of the following: a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a digital signal processor (DSP), a digital signal processing device ( digital signal processing device (DSPD), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), programmable logic device (PLD), gated logic, Transistor logic, discrete hardware circuits, processing circuits, or other suitable hardware, firmware, and/or combinations of hardware and software to perform the various functions described herein.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • DSPD digital signal processing device
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • a processor may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor.
  • processor 112 and/or processor 122 may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit may be used to cause the base station 110 and/or the UE 120 to execute software programs and process data in the software programs.
  • Interfaces may include functions for enabling communication with one or more computer devices (eg, UEs, BSs, and/or network nodes).
  • the interface may include wires for coupling a wired connection, or pins for coupling a wireless transceiver, or chips and/or pins for a wireless connection.
  • an interface may include a transmitter, receiver, transceiver, and/or antenna. The interface can be configured to use any available protocol (eg 3GPP standards).
  • Program in this application is used in a broad sense to mean software.
  • Non-limiting examples of software are program code, programs, subroutines, instructions, sets of instructions, codes, code segments, software modules, applications, software applications, and the like.
  • the program may run in the processor and/or computer to cause the base station 110 and/or the UE 120 to perform various functions and/or processes described in this application.
  • Memory may store data manipulated by processors 112, 122 when executing software.
  • Memories 113, 123 may be implemented using any storage technology.
  • memory may be any available storage medium accessible to the processor and/or computer.
  • Non-limiting examples of storage media include: RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, removable media, optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media, magnetic storage devices, flash memory, registers, state memory, remote mount memory, local or remote memory component, or any other medium capable of carrying or storing software, data or information and accessible by a processor/computer.
  • Memory eg, memory 113 and/or memory 123 and processor (eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) may be provided separately or integrated together.
  • the memory may be used in connection with the processor to enable the processor to read information from the memory, store and/or write information in the memory.
  • Memory 113 may be integrated into processor 112 .
  • Memory 123 may be integrated into processor 122.
  • the processor eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) and the memory (eg, memory 113 and/or memory 123) may be provided in an integrated circuit (eg, the integrated circuit may be provided in a UE or a base station or other network node) .
  • DMRS Dedicated demodulation reference signal
  • DMRS Demodulation reference signal
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • control channels such as physical uplink control channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PUCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the DMRS vector sent by the transmitter is s and the data symbol vector sent is x.
  • the DMRS and data symbols perform the same precoding operation, that is, multiplied by the same precoding matrix P.
  • the corresponding received signal vector at the receiving end It can be expressed as follows.
  • the above formula (1-1) is the equivalent received signal vector (y) of the data symbol transmitted to the receiving end
  • the above formula (1-2) is the equivalent received signal vector (r) of DMRS transmitted to the receiving end.
  • Vector n represents noise.
  • the equivalent channels experienced are both
  • the receiving end can use the channel estimation algorithm (such as least squares (LS) channel estimation, or minimum mean square error (MMSE) channel estimation, etc.) based on the known DMRS vector s to obtain the equivalent channel (i.e. HP) estimate.
  • LS least squares
  • MMSE minimum mean square error
  • MIMO Multiple input multiple output
  • DMRS is used to estimate equivalent channels (i.e. HP), its dimension is N R ⁇ R (i.e. N R rows and R columns).
  • NR is the number of receiving antennas
  • R is the number of transmission streams (also called the number of transmission layers, the number of spatial layers, or rank).
  • a DMRS port corresponds to a spatial layer.
  • R For MIMO transmission with R transmission layer number, the required number of DMRS ports is R.
  • R For MIMO transmission with R transmission layer number, usually different DMRS ports are orthogonal ports.
  • DMRS symbols corresponding to different DMRS ports are orthogonal in at least one domain of frequency domain, time frequency or code domain.
  • transmission layer number and “rank” have the same meaning and can be used interchangeably.
  • uplink multi-layer transmission signals are usually precoded.
  • the data symbol vector sent by the terminal device is .
  • the precoding matrix is W
  • the precoded transmitted signal vector can be expressed as:
  • the precoding matrix (W) used by the terminal device in uplink transmission is usually indicated by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix W is usually selected from a preset precoding matrix set (also called a codebook codebook).
  • a codebook codebook also called a codebook codebook.
  • the precoding matrix W For a multi-antenna system, the network device sends a TPMI (Transmit Precoding Matrix Indication) to the terminal device to indicate which precoding matrix in the codebook set is the uplink precoding matrix that needs to be used.
  • the TPMI Transmit Precoding Matrix Indication
  • the antenna architecture and capabilities of different terminal equipment vary.
  • the precoding matrices that can be used are different.
  • the terminal equipment can use the precoding matrix for non-coherent transmission and the precoding matrix for partial coherent transmission in Table 1 to Table 4, corresponding to Table 1
  • the terminal device For uplink transmission, when the terminal device is configured with multiple antennas to transmit radio frequency channels, the terminal device can perform uplink MIMO transmission through multiple antennas. Or multiple terminal devices transmit simultaneously on the same time-frequency resources to form a virtual MIMO system, that is, uplink (UL) multi-user (MU) MIMO transmission (UL MU-MIMO).
  • UL MU-MIMO uplink multi-user MIMO transmission
  • the NR protocol supports two uplink MIMO transmission modes: codebook-based transmission and non-codebook transmission.
  • the precoding matrix for uplink transmission can be determined based on a fixed or preset codebook.
  • the codebook-based uplink transmission process includes: 1) The terminal device sends a sounding reference signal (SRS) to the network device. 2) The network equipment performs uplink channel measurements based on the SRS sent by the terminal equipment, and determines the DMRS port index, transmission layer number (i.e. rank), precoding matrix, modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and other information for uplink transmission. . 3) The network device notifies the terminal device of PUSCH resource scheduling information such as MCS, TPMI index, transmission layer number (i.e. rank), and DMRS port index.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the terminal equipment codes and modulates the uplink data based on the MCS indicated by the network equipment, determines the precoding matrix based on the indicated TPMI index and the number of transmission layers, and precodes the uplink data and the DMRS signal indicated by the DMRS port index respectively, and then Send uplink data and DMRS.
  • the sending behavior of the terminal device is scheduled by the network device.
  • the network device can notify the terminal device of the transmission layer number (also called rank), TPMI index, and corresponding DMRS port index for sending uplink data through indication information.
  • the terminal device can use the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index and the DMRS and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) indicated by the DMRS port index on the corresponding time-frequency resource to send the uplink data and DMRS at the time of sending the uplink data.
  • the meaning of the DMRS port index and the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) can be found in existing standards or protocols, and will not be detailed here.
  • the network device can indicate the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) and the corresponding TPMI to the terminal device through downlink control information (DCI) signaling. index, and DMRS port index.
  • DCI signaling includes precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields, which are used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the corresponding TPMI index.
  • precoding information and number of layers precoding information and number of layers
  • the protocol defines different optional combinations of the number of transmission layers (ie, rank value) and TPMI index.
  • the configuration parameter of the terminal device is that the transform precoder is not turned on (cyclic prefix (CP) orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) waveform)
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing
  • the optional combinations of rank and TPMI index are as shown in Table 5 below.
  • the TPMI index value in Table 5 represents the corresponding precoding matrix in the aforementioned Table 1 to the aforementioned Table 4.
  • Table 5 Optional combinations of 4 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)
  • the first column, the third column, and the fifth column of the above Table 5 all represent the values of the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields.
  • the values of the precoding information and number of layers are index values, one
  • the index value represents a combination of rank and TPMI index.
  • the second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 5 above respectively represent the optional combinations of rank and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities.
  • the terminal device can learn the number of transmission layers for uplink transmission based on the value of the precoding information and number of layers fields in DCI signaling and its corresponding antenna capabilities (such as coherent, partially coherent, or non-coherent) (i.e. rank) and TPMI index.
  • the number of transmission layers for uplink transmission can be determined
  • DCI signaling also contains an antenna port field, which is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the terminal device can select the corresponding DMRS port index table based on the rank value obtained from the precoding information and layer number fields and its own antenna capabilities, thereby determining the DMRS port index indicated by the antenna port field.
  • the first column (value) in the above Tables 6 to 9 represents the value of the antenna port field
  • the third column (DMRS port(s)) represents the DMRS port index value.
  • the meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in the above Tables 6 to 9 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the precoding matrix for non-codebook transmission is no longer selected from the preset codebook, thus saving the indication overhead of the precoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrix does not need to be selected from a limited preset precoding set, breaking through the limitations of the precoding matrix in the codebook on the amplitude and phase quantization accuracy, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding matrix and further improve the transmission performance. .
  • the non-codebook uplink transmission process includes: 1) The terminal equipment performs channel measurement through the downlink reference signal, obtains the candidate uplink precoding matrix, and precodes the SRS based on the determined uplink precoding matrix. Sent to network device. 2) The network device performs channel estimation based on the SRS sent by the terminal device, schedules the terminal device based on the channel measurement results, determines the SRS resources for uplink transmission and the MCS for uplink transmission, and notifies the terminal device. The SRS resources for uplink transmission are notified to the terminal device through the SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI). 3) The terminal device determines the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) based on the received SRI, codes and modulates the data through MCS information, and then sends the precoded uplink data.
  • SRS resource indicator SRI
  • SRS resource indicator SRI
  • the sounding reference signal is mainly used by network equipment to determine the quality of the uplink channel, thereby performing uplink frequency selective scheduling.
  • Network equipment can configure the time-frequency resource location occupied by SRS resources and the location of SRS resources through high-level signaling such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling or medium access control-control element (MAC-CE) signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC-CE medium access control-control element
  • the configuration information of each SRS resource (for example, the high-level parameter SRS-Resource) includes at least: the index number of the SRS resource, the time-frequency location information occupied by the SRS resource, the SRS transmission port number, etc.
  • the time domain types of SRS resource configuration include periodic, semi-static and aperiodic.
  • the network device can indicate the SRS resource configuration information and the channel state information (CSI) reference signal (CSI reference signal, CSI-RS) resources associated with the SRS through RRC signaling.
  • Configuration information wherein the CSI-RS resource configuration information includes the port of the CSI-RS resource, the time-frequency resources occupied, etc.
  • the network device sends CSI-RS on the corresponding time-frequency resources, and the terminal device receives the CSI-RS on the corresponding time-frequency resources and obtains the candidate precoding matrix based on the channel reciprocity assumption and its own algorithm, and then uses the corresponding SRS resources to The SRS processed by the candidate precoding matrix is transmitted upstream, and the network device receives and measures the weighted SRS on the corresponding SRS time-frequency resource to obtain uplink channel information.
  • the network device determines the time-frequency resources and transmission scheme used by the terminal device to send PUSCH through its own implementation algorithm, and indicates this information to the terminal device through the DCI signaling carried in the PDCCH used for uplink scheduling.
  • the transmission scheme at least includes beam information, SRS resource indication (SRI), modulation and coding strategy (MCS), and antenna port indication information used by the terminal equipment to transmit PUSCH.
  • SRI SRS resource indication
  • MCS modulation and coding strategy
  • the terminal device After receiving the DCI that schedules PUSCH transmission, the terminal device will perform PUSCH transmission according to the time-frequency resources and transmission scheme indicated in the DCI.
  • the SRS sent on each SRS resource corresponds to a precoding matrix.
  • one SRS resource is a virtual port, and the number of SRS resources configured in high-level signaling represents the maximum number of layers that PUSCH transmission can support.
  • the terminal device needs to send DMRS associated with PUSCH.
  • the network device uses DMRS to perform channel estimation and demodulate the corresponding PUSCH.
  • the DMRS port has a one-to-one correspondence with the SRS resource indicated by the SRI.
  • the function of SRI is to instruct the terminal equipment to perform the same phase weighting operation between the transmitting antennas used to transmit the PUSCH according to the same phase weighting operation between the transmitting antennas that transmit the SRS indicated by the SRI, and also indicates the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH.
  • N SRS indicates the number of SRS resources configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
  • the number of bits in the SRI field depends on the number of configured SRS resources. When the number of SRS resources is greater than 1, the number of bits in the SRI field is greater than 0.
  • N SRS 4 as an example, each value of the 4-bit SRI field is used to indicate one or more SRS resources, and the number of SRS resources represents the number of transmission layers.
  • the precoding matrices corresponding to four single-port SRS resources are: [1 0 0 0], [0 1 0 0], [0 0 1 0], [0 0 0 1].
  • SRI field indicates an index value of 7
  • SRS resource numbers 1 and 2 are indicated
  • PUSCH transmission uses 2 layers, and the precoding matrices of each layer are [0 1 0 0] and [0 0 1 0] respectively. .
  • embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support a combined indication of the number of transmission layers and TPMI index greater than 4 antenna ports, as well as a DMRS port index indication. , and can reduce the instruction overhead without affecting compatibility.
  • the embodiment of the present application can reuse the transmission layer number of the 4-antenna port (there are 1 to 4 layers) and the optional combination table of the TPMI index (the above table 5) and the DMRS port index indication table (the above table) to the greatest extent.
  • the overhead of the combined indication of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports is reduced and the overhead is reduced by more than 4-antenna port DMRS port index indicates overhead to reduce redundancy.
  • non-codebook non-codebook
  • embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting more than 4 layers of non-codebook transmission. transmission, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • Figure 4 is a first schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas.
  • the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the network device sends first indication information and second indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index, the multiple combinations include the first combination and the second combination;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index;
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets
  • One of the multiple sets includes at least a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, value, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields in DCI signaling, used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI corresponding to the number of transmission layers.
  • the second indication information may be the antenna port (antenna port) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value (denoted as the first value for ease of description), and this value (i.e., the first value) indicates the transmission layer number and TPMI index.
  • Multiple combinations The number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the number of transmission layers is the same as the number of layers of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index.
  • One of the transport layer numbers and the TPMI index corresponding to this transport layer number are a combination.
  • the multiple combinations include at least a first combination and a second combination.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 2.
  • the number of transmission layers in the combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination
  • the number of transport layers is 8.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  • the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination may also have other corresponding relationships, which are not limited to the above examples. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers.
  • the value of the above-mentioned second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, each set includes at least one value, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination.
  • the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) in is the same.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination.
  • the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) in is the same.
  • the DMRS port index indicated by the antenna port field corresponds to different transmission layer numbers.
  • the indications of rank, TPMI index and DMRS port index need to be designed.
  • the following is an example of how the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) indicates the combination of transmission layer number (i.e. rank) and TPMI index, and how the second indication information (such as antenna port field) indicates in the embodiment of the present application DMRS port index.
  • Table 11 shows the optional combinations of the TPMI index and the number of transmission layers for the 8-antenna port. That is to say, Table 11 shows the optional combinations of layers 1 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes.
  • the first column, the third column, and the fifth column in Table 11 all represent the values of the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields).
  • the second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 11 respectively represent the optional combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities.
  • the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index.
  • the first value may be 8.
  • a TPMI index in Table 11 identifies a precoding matrix, and this application does not limit the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index in Table 11.
  • Table 11 Optional combinations of 8 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)
  • some values of the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields) in Table 11 indicate two combinations of the transmission layer number (i.e., rank) and TPMI index, while the other part values indicate the transmission layer number (i.e., rank). and 1 combination of TPMI index.
  • Table 15a and Table 15b show dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example
  • Table 12b, Table 13b, Table 14b and Table 15b take Take dual-symbol Type 2 DMRS as an example.
  • Table 12b, Table 13b, Table 14b and Table 15b take Take dual-symbol Type 2 DMRS as an example.
  • the following uses dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example.
  • the first column in Table 12a to Table 15b represents the value of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column represents the DMRS port index indicated by the corresponding value.
  • the meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in Table 12a to Table 15b can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the value of the second indication information may belong to one of multiple sets.
  • the multiple sets include a first set and a second set.
  • the first set and the second set may be distinguished by a DMRS port index number.
  • the DMRS port index number indicated by each value in the same set is the same, and the DMRS port index number indicated by the values in different sets is different.
  • the DMRS port index number indicated by any value in the first set is different from the DMRS port index number indicated by the second set.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by any value in the set is not the same.
  • the first set is 0 to 13 (including 0 and 13), and the second set is 14; for table 12b, the first set is 0 to 27 (including 0 and 27), and the second set includes 28 and 29.
  • the first set is 0 to 9 (including 0 and 9), and the second set is 10; for table 13b, the first set is 0 to 18 (including 0 and 18), and the second set includes 19 and 20.
  • the first set is 0 to 2 (inclusive of 0 and 2), and the second set is 3; for table 14b, the first set is 0 to 5 (inclusive of 0 and 5), and the second set is 6.
  • the first set is 0 to 3 (including 0 and 3), and the second set is 4; for table 15b, the first set is 0 to 4 (including 0 and 4), and the second set is 5.
  • DMRS port index shown in Table 12a i.e. 0,1,2,3,4). Table 12b is similar to Table 12a and will not be described in detail here.
  • DMRS port index shown in Table 13a i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,6). Table 13b is similar to Table 13a and will not be described in detail here.
  • DMRS port index shown in Table 14a i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,5,6). Table 14b is similar to Table 14a and will not be described in detail here.
  • Table 15b is similar to Table 15a and will not be described in detail here.
  • Tables 12a to 15b take dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS and dual-symbol Type 2 DMRS as examples, and the above-mentioned DMRS port index table is only an example. The same applies to other DMRS types, such as single-symbol Type 1 DMRS and Type 2 DMRS.
  • the optional combination indication of rank and TPMI index and the DMRS port index indication based on the corresponding relationship are simpler and more direct.
  • the combination of number (i.e. rank) and TPMI index, and how to indicate the DMRS port index, can refer to the indication method under the 8-antenna port, which will not be described in detail here. It can also be understood that, for convenience of description, 8 antenna ports are used as an example for description below.
  • the terminal device can determine the network device by combining the received first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above second indication information (such as the antenna port field) and its own antenna capabilities. Indicates the number of transport layers (i.e. rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), according to the transmission layer in the above-mentioned multiple combinations number determines the DMRS port Index the table to determine the values contained in the first set and the values contained in the second set; and then determine a combination from the above multiple combinations according to which set the value of the second indication information belongs to and the terminal device's own antenna capability. For example, if the value of the second indication information belongs to the first set, the terminal device determines the first combination.
  • the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index in the first combination are the uplink transmission configuration configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines the second combination.
  • the number of transport layers and the TPMI index in the second combination are the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission configured by the network device for the terminal device. .
  • the terminal equipment can determine that the number of transmission layers in these multiple combinations is 1 and 5, and then it can determine the DMRS port index table as the above table 12a (taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example).
  • the terminal device can, according to the above multiple combinations, The number of transmission layers and the value of the above-mentioned second indication information determine which DMRS port indexes are indicated by the second indication information. Then, based on the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information and the own antenna capability, the above-mentioned Determine one combination among multiple combinations.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information such as precoding information and layer number field
  • the above-mentioned second indication information such as the antenna port field
  • the terminal device determines the first combination, the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index in the first combination. That is, the number of uplink transmission transmission layers and TPMI configured by the network device for the terminal device. If the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers in the second combination, the terminal device determines the second combination, and the number of transmission layers and TPMI index in the second combination are the network equipment. Configure the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission on the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine that the rank indicated by the network device is 1 or 5.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the specific rank value based on the value of the second indication information. and DMRS port index to further determine the TPMI index corresponding to the rank value. It not only supports the combined indication of the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI index of 8-antenna ports and the indication of DMRS port index of 8-antenna ports, reducing indication overhead, but also supports uplink transmission of up to 8 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • Table 16 shows the optional combinations of the TPMI index and the number of transmission layers for the 8-antenna port. That is to say, Table 16 shows the optional combinations of layers 1 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes.
  • the first column, the third column, and the fifth column in Table 16 all represent the values of the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields).
  • the second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 16 respectively represent the optional combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities.
  • a TPMI index in Table 16 identifies a precoding matrix, and this application does not limit the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index in Table 16.
  • Table 16 Optional combinations of 8 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)
  • the number of transmission layers ie, rank
  • the corresponding DMRS port indexes are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 20 below.
  • the first column in Table 17 to Table 20 represents the value of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column represents the DMRS port index indicated by the corresponding value.
  • the meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in Tables 17 to 20 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be detailed here.
  • the value of the second indication information may belong to one of multiple sets.
  • the multiple sets include a first set and a second set.
  • the first set and the second set may be distinguished by a DMRS port index number.
  • the DMRS port index number indicated by each value in the same set is the same, and the DMRS port index number indicated by the values in different sets is different.
  • the DMRS port index number indicated by any value in the first set is different from the DMRS port index number indicated by the second set.
  • the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by any value in the set is not the same.
  • the first set and the second set are not listed one by one here.
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • the network device can combine the above-mentioned Table 16 and Table 17 to Table 20 to jointly indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index configured for the terminal device; for details, refer to the previous description, I won’t go into details here.
  • the terminal device can determine the network device by combining the received first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above second indication information (such as the antenna port field) and its own antenna capabilities. Indicates the transmission layer number (i.e. rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index; the specific determination method can refer to the previous description, and will not be repeated here.
  • the indication overhead can be reduced; and low rank
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application jointly determines the number of transmission layers (ie, rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index when performing uplink transmission through the value of the first indication information, the value of the second indication information and its own antenna capability. .
  • the embodiments of the present application can not only support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index greater than 4 antenna ports and the DMRS port index indication greater than 4 antenna ports, but can also reduce the indication overhead without affecting compatibility.
  • Figure 5 is a second schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas.
  • the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the network device sends first indication information and third indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index.
  • the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information has at least a first value. , the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index; the third indication information indicates one of the multiple combinations.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information and the third indication information.
  • S202 The terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the first indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers fields in DCI signaling, which is used to indicate the combination of the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI index corresponding to the number of transmission layers; the third indication The information may be one or more of the MCS field, redundancy version field and new data indicator field in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version. field.
  • the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword also takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate the codeword (codeword) Not enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled) , at this time, the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index, and the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
  • first indication information such as precoding information and layer number field
  • first indication information such as precoding information and layer number field
  • DCI downlink control information
  • transport block 1 For transport block 1, it includes MCS, new data indicator (new data indicator) ) and redundancy version.
  • MCS new data indicator
  • redundancy version If the high-level signaling maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI is configured as 2 (that is, 2 codeword transmission is enabled), it also includes the relevant fields of transport block 2: MCS, new data indication and redundancy version.
  • MCS new data indication and redundancy version.
  • a 5-bit MCS field is used to indicate the scheduled MCS.
  • the new data indicator field is used to indicate whether the scheduled PUSCH is newly transmitted data or retransmitted data.
  • the redundancy version field is used to indicate the encoded redundancy version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
  • the DCI format can be format 0_1 or format 0_2.
  • the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block is not 26 or the value of the redundant version field is not 1, it means that the transport block is enabled; at this time, the MCS field is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index.
  • the redundant version field is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination among the above-mentioned plurality of combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled.
  • the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transmission block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, indicating that the transmission block is not enabled (disabled), that is, the transmission The codeword corresponding to the block is not enabled.
  • one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled (enabled) and the other codeword is not enabled (disabled), which is used to indicate that the combination of the transmission layer number and TPMI index indicated by the first indication information is The first combination among the above combinations.
  • the above third indication information may indicate the second combination among the above multiple combinations by indicating that both codewords are enabled.
  • the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transmission block in DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, indicating that both transmission blocks are enabled (enabled), that is, these two transmissions
  • the codewords corresponding to the blocks are all enabled. At this time, both codewords are enabled, which is used to indicate that the combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index indicated by the first indication information is the second combination among the multiple combinations.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and TPMI index indicated by the network device by combining the received first indication information, the above third indication information and its own antenna capabilities. For example, when the above-mentioned third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first combination from the above-mentioned multiple combinations in combination with its own antenna capability, and the first combination is The number of transport layers and TPMI index in the combination are the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the terminal equipment determines a second combination from the above-mentioned multiple combinations based on its own antenna capability.
  • the number of transmission layers in the second combination and The TPMI index is the number of uplink transmission transport layers and TPMI configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the above information indication method may further include: the network device sends second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the above information indication method may also include:
  • the network device sends second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets.
  • the multiple sets include at least the first set and the second set.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the terminal device determines the DMRS port index of the terminal device according to the value of the second indication information.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried and sent in the same signaling as the above-mentioned first indication information and/or the above-mentioned third indication information, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the second indication information may also be carried in DCI signaling.
  • the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the DMRS port index tables corresponding to different ranks are as shown in the aforementioned tables 12a to 15b or as shown in the aforementioned tables 17 to 20, which will not be described again here.
  • the second indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information are related to each other. For example, if the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the value of the second indication information belongs to the first set; if the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, , then the value of the second indication information belongs to the second set.
  • the index is encoded in a table, and the TPMI index corresponding to low rank remains unchanged. It not only supports the combined indication of the transmission layer number of the 8-antenna port (there are 1 to 8 layers) and the TPMI index, but also can be used without affecting compatibility. case, reducing instruction overhead.
  • the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal device through an indication information. Which of these multiple combinations is allocated so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the number of transport layers and TPMI index assigned to it by the network device.
  • the DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have corresponding relationships are encoded in one In the table, and there is at least one value in the table indicating multiple DMRS port index groups, the indication information is used to indicate which DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups the network device allocates to the terminal device.
  • Figure 6 is a third schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas.
  • the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the network device sends fourth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index.
  • the fourth indication information has at least a second value.
  • the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each of which The DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index, and the third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information and the third indication information.
  • the terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the third indication information.
  • the above-mentioned fourth indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the fourth indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the fourth indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index
  • the third indication information may be the MCS field, redundancy version field and new data indication in DCI signaling.
  • the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundant version field.
  • the above-mentioned fourth indication information has at least one value (recorded as the second value for ease of description).
  • This value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • Each DMRS port The index group includes at least one DMRS port index.
  • the multiple DMRS port index groups include at least a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group.
  • the first DMRS port index group and the second DMRS port index group are respectively associated with different transmission layer numbers. In other words, the number of DMRS port indexes included in the first DMRS port index group is different from the number of DMRS port indexes included in the second DMRS port index group.
  • the above third indication information may indicate the first DMRS port index group among the above multiple DMRS port index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled.
  • the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled.
  • the above third instruction information can be The second DMRS port index group among the plurality of DMRS port index groups is indicated by indicating that both codewords are enabled.
  • the meaning of the third indication information in the embodiment of the present application is similar to the meaning of the third indication information in the foregoing second embodiment. The difference is that: in the foregoing second embodiment, the third indication information indicates one of the two codewords. One codeword is enabled to indicate one of multiple combinations, and the third indication information in the embodiment of the present application indicates one of multiple DMRS combinations by indicating that one of two codewords is enabled.
  • the indication of the DMRS port index needs to be designed.
  • the following is an example of how the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) indicates the DMRS port index in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first column in Table 21 to Table 24 represents the value of the above-mentioned fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column and the sixth column represent the DMRS port index corresponding to different ranks.
  • the meanings of other column parameters in Table 21 to Table 24 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the first column in Table 25 to Table 28 represents the value of the above-mentioned fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column and the sixth column represent the DMRS port index corresponding to different ranks. It can be seen from Table 25 to Table 28 that there is at least one value in the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the two indicated DMRS port index groups are: 1 (i.e., the first DMRS port index group); 0, 1, 4, 5, 8 ,9,12,13 (that is, the second DMRS port index group).
  • the embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have a corresponding relationship in a table, so that the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) has at least one value indicating multiple DMRS port index groups. It will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port index indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and it can reduce redundant indication bits.
  • the instructions under the port will not be described in detail here. It can also be understood that, for convenience of description, 8 antenna ports are used as an example for description below.
  • the terminal device may combine the received fourth indication information and the above third indication information to determine the DMRS port index indicated by the network device. For example, when the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the plurality of DMRS port index groups. When the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines a second DMRS port index group from the plurality of DMRS port index groups.
  • the two indicated DMRS port index groups are: 2, 3, 6, 7 (i.e., the first DMRS port index group) and 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ,6,7 (that is, the second DMRS port index group).
  • the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, it means that the DMRS port index indicated by the network device is 2, 3, 6, and 7 (ie, the first DMRS port index group).
  • the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, it means that the DMRS port index indicated by the network device is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (ie, the second DMRS port index group).
  • There is at least one value in the table indicating multiple DMRS port index groups (each DMRS port index group includes at least (a DMRS port index), so there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, so no additional indication information overhead is introduced, and redundant indication bits can be reduced.
  • the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal through an indication message.
  • the DMRS port index assigned by the device is which DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups, so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the DMRS port index assigned to it by the network device. Therefore, this embodiment of the present application can support DMRS port index indication of 8 antenna ports.
  • the above information indication method may further include: the network device sends first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index.
  • a value of the first indication information indicates a combination of the transport layer number and the TPMI index. That is, an optional combination of the 8-antenna port's transport layer number and TPMI index is indicated by a single value.
  • the above information indication method also includes:
  • the network device sends first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transport layer number and the TPMI index.
  • the transport layer number corresponds to the TPMI index.
  • the first indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value Indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index, the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination; the first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group in the multiple DMRS port index groups, and the second combination is associated with the The second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • step S303 in the embodiment of this application can refer to the implementation of the same or corresponding parts in step S101 in the previous embodiment 1, or the implementation of the same or corresponding parts in step S201 in the previous embodiment 2, I won’t go into details here.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination among the above-mentioned multiple combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled. For example, the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled.
  • the above third indication information may indicate the second combination among the above multiple combinations by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, if the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transport block in the DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, it means that the codewords corresponding to the two transport blocks are both enabled.
  • S304 The terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
  • step S304 in the embodiment of this application may refer to the implementation of step S202 in the second embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • the index is encoded in a table, and the TPMI index corresponding to low rank remains unchanged. It not only supports the combined indication of the transmission layer number of the 8-antenna port (there are 1 to 8 layers) and the TPMI index, but also can be used without affecting compatibility. case, reducing instruction overhead.
  • the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal device through an indication information. Which of these multiple combinations is allocated so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the number of transport layers and TPMI index assigned to it by the network device.
  • Embodiment 4 of this application mainly introduces how to support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers.
  • Figure 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas.
  • the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the network device sends fifth indication information and second indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each of which The SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index;
  • the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set,
  • the second indication information is a value in the first set
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the second indication information is a value in the second set
  • the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth indication information and the second indication information.
  • the terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups according to the value of the second indication information.
  • the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the fifth indication information and the second indication information may be carried in DCI signaling.
  • the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index;
  • the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate DMRS port index.
  • SRI SRS Resource Indication
  • the DMRS port index tables corresponding to different ranks are as shown in the aforementioned tables 12a to 15b. or as shown in the aforementioned Table 17 to Table 20, which will not be described again here.
  • the above-mentioned fifth indication information has at least one value (recorded as the first value for ease of description).
  • This value i.e., the first value
  • the group includes at least one SRS resource index.
  • the first value in the embodiment of the present application is independent of each other and is not necessarily the same or different from the first value in the foregoing embodiment 1; they are merely expressions adopted for convenience of description.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the first transmission layer number, or in other words, the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the second transmission layer number, or in other words, the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number.
  • the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4
  • the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8. For example, taking 8 antenna ports as an example, when the first transmission layer number is 1, the second transmission layer number is 5; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6.
  • the number of second transmission layers is 7; when the number of first transmission layers is 4, the number of second transmission layers is 8.
  • the first transmission layer number is 1, the second transmission layer number is 8; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 7; when the first transmission layer number is 3, the second transmission layer number is 3.
  • the number of layers is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5.
  • the first transmission layer number and the second transmission layer number may also have other corresponding relationships, which are not limited to the above examples. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the corresponding relationship between the transmission layer numbers.
  • the indication of the SRS resource index needs to be designed.
  • the following is an example of how the fifth indication information (such as the SRI field) indicates the SRS resource index in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number
  • the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number.
  • the embodiment of this application jointly indicates multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships (for example, using one value to indicate multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships). Specific examples are as shown in Table 29 below. shown.
  • the terminal device may combine the received fifth indication information (eg, SRI field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (eg, antenna port field) to determine the network device indication SRS resource index and DMRS port index.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of SRS resource indexes contained in the above-mentioned multiple SRS resource index groups and The value of the above-mentioned second indication information determines which DMRS port indexes are indicated by the second indication information.
  • SRS resource index group For example, if the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups; then the terminal device determines the first SRS Resource index group, the SRS resource index included in the first SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines the second SRS resource index group , the SRS resource index included in the second SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the indicated SRS resource index groups are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (i.e., the second SRS resource index group) and 0 (i.e., the first SRS resource index group).
  • the terminal device can determine that the rank indicated by the network device is 1 or 5.
  • the corresponding The DMRS port index table is the aforementioned table 12a.
  • Embodiment 5 of this application mainly introduces another way to support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of the fifth information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas.
  • the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the network device sends fifth indication information and third indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource index.
  • the fifth indication information has at least a first value.
  • the first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each of which The SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the third indication information indicates one SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth indication information and the third indication information.
  • the terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups according to the third indication information.
  • the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application.
  • the fifth indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling.
  • the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index
  • the third indication information may be the MCS field, redundancy version ( redundancy version) field and one or more of the new data indicator (new data indicator) fields.
  • the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version field.
  • the fifth indication information (such as the SRI field)
  • the value of the SRI field and its indicated SRS resource index are as shown in the aforementioned Table 29, which will not be described again here.
  • the third indication information reference can be made to the relevant description in the foregoing second embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups indicated by the first value include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the first transmission layer number, or in other words, the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number.
  • the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the second transmission layer number, or in other words, the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number.
  • the third indication information may indicate the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled.
  • the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled.
  • the third indication information may indicate the second SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, if the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transport block in the DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, it means that the codewords corresponding to the two transport blocks are both enabled.
  • the terminal device may combine the received fifth indication information and the above third indication information to determine the SRS resource index indicated by the network device.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • the SRS resource index included in an SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a second SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
  • the second SRS resource index group contains The SRS resource index is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the indicated SRS resource index groups are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ( That is, the second SRS resource index group) and 0,1 (that is, the first SRS resource index group). If the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines that the SRS resource index indicated by the network device is 0,1 (ie, the first SRS resource index group). If the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines that the SRS resource index indicated by the network device is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (ie, the second SRS resource index group).
  • the above information indication method also includes:
  • the network device sends second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets.
  • the multiple sets include at least the first set and the second set.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information and determines the DMRS port index.
  • step S504 in this embodiment of the present application may refer to the implementation of the same or corresponding parts of step S401 in the fourth embodiment, which will not be described again here.
  • the above information indication method further includes: the network device sends fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index, the fourth indication information has at least a second value, and the second The value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each DMRS port index group including at least one DMRS port index.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information.
  • the terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the above third indication information.
  • Which SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups is the SRS resource index allocated by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the SRS resource index allocated by the network device; it can support SRS resources of up to 8 SRS resources. Index indication, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of up to 8 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a precoding matrix set (codebook) corresponding to 8 transmitting antennas.
  • the precoding matrix set (codebook) corresponding to 8 antennas can be shown in Table 30 to Table 37 below. It can be understood that determining the TPMI index determines the unique precoding matrix. It should be understood that Table 30 to Table 37 are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific content of the precoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 56 to 63 in the above Table 30 are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 64 to 71 in the above Table 30 are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 70 to 75 in the above Table 31 are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 48 to 55 in the above Table 32 are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 41 and 43 in Table 33 above are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 4 to 6 in Table 36 above are as follows:
  • the precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 3 and 4 in Table 37 above are as follows:
  • the antenna architecture and capabilities of different terminal equipment are different.
  • the precoding matrices that can be used are different.
  • the value range of the TPMI index is different.
  • the terminal device can use any of the above Table 30 to Table 37 because the antenna capability of the terminal device is strong. precoding matrix.
  • the above content elaborates the method provided by the present application in detail.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide corresponding devices or equipment.
  • This application divides the network equipment and the terminal equipment into functional modules according to the above method embodiments.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in this application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • the network equipment and terminal equipment of the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 9 to 11.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit 10 and a processing unit 20.
  • the communication device may be the network device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 9 can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device may be a network device or a chip, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is used to send first indication information and second indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the first indication information and the second indication information, and to send the first indication information and the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 4), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is used to send the first indication information and the third indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the first indication information and the third indication information, and to send the first indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send second indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate second indication information, and send the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 5), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to send fourth indication information and third indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate fourth indication information and third indication information, and to send the fourth indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send the first indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate first indication information, and send the first indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 6), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to send the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the fifth indication information and the second indication information, and to send the fifth indication information and the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 7), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is used to send the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the fifth indication information and the third indication information, and to send the fifth indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send second indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is configured to generate second indication information, and send the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 8), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 9 can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device may be a terminal device or a chip, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is used to receive the first indication information and the second indication information; the processing unit 20 is used to determine a combination from multiple combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 4), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the first indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a combination from multiple combinations based on the third indication information.
  • the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination.
  • the processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first combination from multiple combinations; when the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled When , a second combination is determined from multiple combinations.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the second indication information.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 5), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fourth indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups based on the third indication information.
  • the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group.
  • the processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups; when the third indication information indicates that both When each codeword is enabled, the second DMRS port index group is determined from multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the first indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a combination from multiple combinations based on the third indication information.
  • the processing unit 20 is also specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first combination from multiple combinations; when the third When the indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the second combination is determined from multiple combinations.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 6), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fifth indication information and the second indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine an SRS resource from multiple SRS resource index groups according to the value of the second indication information. Index group.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 7), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fifth indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups based on the third indication information. .
  • the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group.
  • the processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups; when the third indication information indicates that both When all codewords are enabled, the second SRS resource index group is determined from multiple SRS resource index groups.
  • the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the second indication information.
  • transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples.
  • specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 8), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
  • the processing unit 20 may be one or more processors, and the transceiver unit 10 may be a transceiver, or the transceiver unit 10 may also be a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit may be a transmitter
  • the receiving unit may be a receiver
  • the sending unit and the receiving unit are integrated into one device, such as a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection method between the processor and the transceiver.
  • the process of sending information (such as sending first instruction information, second instruction information, third instruction information, fourth instruction information, fifth instruction information, etc.) in the above method can be understood as The process by which the processor outputs the above information.
  • the processor When outputting the above information, the processor outputs the above information to the transceiver for transmission by the transceiver. After the above information is output by the processor, it may also need to undergo other processing before reaching the transceiver.
  • the process of receiving information (such as receiving first instruction information, second instruction information, third instruction information, fourth instruction information, fifth instruction information, etc.) in the above method can be understood as the processor receiving the input of the above-mentioned information process.
  • the transceiver receives the above information and inputs it into the processor. Furthermore, after the transceiver receives the above information, the above information may need to undergo other processing before being input to the processor.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may be a network device or a terminal device, or a chip therein.
  • Figure 10 shows only the main components of the communication device 1000. Except processor 1001 and transceiver 1002
  • the communication device may further include a memory 1003 and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
  • the processor 1001 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
  • Memory 1003 is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the transceiver 1002 may include a control circuit and an antenna.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor 1001 can read the software program in the memory 1003, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 1001 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1001.
  • the processor 1001 converts the baseband signal into data and performs processing on the data. deal with.
  • the radio frequency circuit and antenna can be arranged independently of the processor that performs baseband processing.
  • the radio frequency circuit and antenna can be arranged remotely and independently of the communication device. .
  • the processor 1001, the transceiver 1002, and the memory 1003 can be connected through a communication bus.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the first instruction information and the second instruction information sent in step S101 in Figure 4, and/or be used to execute Other processes for the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S101 in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S102 in Figure 4, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the first indication information and the second indication information sent in step S101 in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for the technology described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the first instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S201 in Figure 5 and the second instruction information sent in step S203. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S201 and step S203 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S202 and step S204 in Figure 5, and/or be used to perform the technology described herein. Other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the first indication information and the third indication information sent in step S201 in FIG. 5 and the second indication information sent in step S203, and/or other processes for the technology described herein .
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the third embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S301 in Figure 6 and the first instruction information sent in step S303. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S301 and step S303 in FIG. 6, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the third embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S302 and step S304 in Figure 6, and/or be used to perform the technology described herein. Other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fourth indication information and the third indication information sent in step S301 in Figure 6 and the first indication information sent in step S303, and/or other processes for the technology described herein .
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the fourth embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information sent in step S401 in Figure 7, and/or be used to execute Other processes for the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S401 in FIG. 7, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the fourth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S402 in Figure 7, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fifth indication information and the second indication information sent in step S401 in FIG. 7, and/or other processes for the technology described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the fifth embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S501 in Figure 8 and the second instruction information sent in step S503. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S501 and step S503 in FIG. 8, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the fifth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S502 in Figure 8, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fifth indication information and the third indication information sent in step S501 in Figure 8 and the second indication information sent in step S503, and/or for the methods described herein Other processes of technology.
  • the processor 1001 may include a transceiver for implementing receiving and transmitting functions.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an interface, or an interface circuit.
  • the transceiver circuits, interfaces or interface circuits used to implement the receiving and transmitting functions can be separate or integrated together.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for reading and writing codes/data, or the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for signal transmission or transfer.
  • the processor 1001 may store instructions, which may be computer programs.
  • the computer programs run on the processor 1001 and may cause the communication device 1000 to execute the method described in the above method embodiments.
  • the computer program may be solidified in the processor 1001, in which case the processor 1001 may be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the processor and transceiver described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuits (ICs), analog ICs, radio frequency integrated circuits (RFICs), mixed-signal ICs, application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits) , ASIC), printed circuit board (PCB), electronic equipment, etc.
  • the processor and transceiver can also be manufactured using various IC process technologies, such as complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), n-type metal oxide-semiconductor (NMOS), P-type Metal oxide semiconductor (positive channel metal oxide semiconductor, PMOS), bipolar junction transistor (BJT), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • NMOS n-type metal oxide-semiconductor
  • PMOS P-type Metal oxide semiconductor
  • BJT bipolar junction transistor
  • BiCMOS bipolar CMOS
  • SiGe silicon germanium
  • GaAs gallium arsenide
  • the scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited thereto, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by FIG. 10 .
  • the communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the communication device may be:
  • the IC collection may also include storage components for storing data and computer programs;
  • the processing unit 20 may be one or more logic circuits, and the transceiver unit 10 may be an input-output interface, also known as a communication interface, or an interface circuit. , or interface, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 10 may also be a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit may be an output interface
  • the receiving unit may be an input interface.
  • the sending unit and the receiving unit may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface.
  • Figure 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11 , the communication device shown in FIG. 11 includes a logic circuit 901 and an interface 902 .
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 20 can be implemented by the logic circuit 901, and the transceiver unit 10 can be implemented by the interface 902.
  • the logic circuit 901 can be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc.
  • the interface 902 can be a communication interface, an input/output interface, a pin, etc.
  • FIG. 11 shows that the above communication device is a chip.
  • the chip includes a logic circuit 901 and an interface 902 .
  • the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific connection methods of the logic circuits and interfaces.
  • the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the first indication information and the second indication information; the interface 902 is used to output the The first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the interface 902 is used to input the first instruction information and the second instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the first instruction information according to the first embodiment. 2. Value indicating information, determining a combination from multiple combinations.
  • the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the first indication information and the third indication information; the interface 902 is used to output the the first instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the interface 902 is used to input the first instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the first instruction information and the third instruction information according to the second embodiment.
  • Three indication information determine a combination from multiple combinations.
  • the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fourth instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the interface 902 is used to input the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fourth instruction information according to the third embodiment.
  • Three indication information determine a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups.
  • the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fifth instruction information and the second instruction information.
  • the interface 902 is used to input the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fifth instruction information according to the fourth embodiment. 2.
  • the value of the indication information determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
  • the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fifth instruction information and the third instruction information.
  • the interface 902 is used to input the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fifth instruction information according to the fifth embodiment.
  • Three indication information determine an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
  • the communication device shown in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware to implement the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, or can be implemented in the form of software to implement the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system.
  • the wireless communication system includes a network device and a terminal device.
  • the network device and the terminal device can be used to perform the method in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • this application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the network device in the method provided by this application.
  • This application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application.
  • This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer code.
  • the computer code When the computer code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to perform the operations performed by the network device in the method provided by this application and/or or processing.
  • This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer code.
  • the computer code When the computer code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to perform the operations performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application and/or or processing.
  • the computer program product includes computer code or computer program.
  • the computer code or computer program When the computer code or computer program is run on a computer, it causes the operations performed by the network equipment in the method provided by this application and/or or processing is performed.
  • the computer program product includes computer code or computer program.
  • the computer code or computer program When the computer code or computer program is run on a computer, it causes the operations performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application and/or Processing is performed.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, or may be electrical, mechanical or other forms of connection.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the technical effects of the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • each functional unit in various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a readable
  • the storage medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned readable storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc. that can store program code medium.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are an information indication method and apparatus, and a readable storage medium. The method comprises: a base station sending first indication information and second indication information, wherein the first indication information at least has one value and is used for indicating a plurality of combinations of ranks and TPMI indexes, the second indication information indicates a DMRS port index, when the value of the second indication information is a value in a first set, the DMRS port index is associated with a first combination among the plurality of combinations, and when the value of the second indication information is a value in a second set, the DMRS port index is associated with a second combination among the plurality of combinations; and a UE determining, in combination with the two pieces of indication information, a unique rank, a TPMI index and a corresponding DMRS port index, which are indicated by the base station. By means of the embodiments of the present application, a combined indication of ranks and TPMI port indexes and an indication of a DMRS port index of more than 4 antenna ports can be supported, and the indication overhead can be reduced.

Description

信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质Information indication method, device and readable storage medium
本申请要求于2022年07月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210867896.8、申请名称为“信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on July 22, 2022, with application number 202210867896.8 and the application title "Information Instruction Method, Device and Readable Storage Medium", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference in in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to an information indication method, device and readable storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
对于上行传输，终端设备的发送行为受到网络设备的调度。网络设备可以通过指示信息，通知终端设备发送上行数据的传输流数(也称为传输层数，空间层数或rank)、发送预编码矩阵指示(transmitted precoding matrix indicator，TPMI)索引、以及对应的解调参考信号(dedicated demodulation reference signal，DMRS)端口索引。其中，TPMI索引用于标识上行传输使用的预编码矩阵。DMRS端口索引用于标识DMRS端口，一个DMRS端口(DMRS port)与一个空间层相对应。对于传输层数为R的多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)传输，需要的DMRS端口数目为R。For uplink transmission, the sending behavior of the terminal device is scheduled by the network device. The network device can notify the terminal device through the indication information of the number of transmission streams (also called the number of transmission layers, the number of spatial layers or ranks) for sending uplink data, the transmitted precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) index, and the corresponding Dedicated demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port index. Among them, the TPMI index is used to identify the precoding matrix used for uplink transmission. The DMRS port index is used to identify the DMRS port. A DMRS port (DMRS port) corresponds to a spatial layer. For multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission with a transmission layer number of R, the number of DMRS ports required is R.
在新一代无线接入技术(new radio access technology，NR/5G)协议中，终端设备最大只能支持4层(即rank＝4)的上行传输。但随着终端设备能力的进一步提升，大于4个(比如8个)发送天线的终端设备日益增多。而大于4天线的终端设备最大可支持的传输层数(即rank)也大于4，比如8天线的终端设备最大可支持8层(即rank＝8)的上行传输。所以，为了支持大于4层的上行传输，大于4天线端口的TPMI索引和DMRS端口索引的指示亟待探索。In the new generation wireless access technology (new radio access technology, NR/5G) protocol, terminal equipment can only support a maximum of 4 layers (i.e. rank=4) uplink transmission. However, as the capabilities of terminal equipment further improve, the number of terminal equipment with more than 4 (such as 8) transmitting antennas is increasing day by day. The maximum number of transmission layers (rank) that a terminal device with more than 4 antennas can support is also greater than 4. For example, a terminal device with 8 antennas can support a maximum of 8 layers (rank=8) of uplink transmission. Therefore, in order to support uplink transmission of greater than 4 layers, the indication of TPMI index and DMRS port index of greater than 4 antenna ports needs to be explored urgently.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质，可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示以及DMRS端口索引的指示，比如支持8天线端口的传输层数(最大8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示以及8天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示，并可以减少指示开销。Embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports and the indication of the DMRS port index, such as supporting the transmission layer number of 8 antenna ports. (Maximum 8 layers) and combined indication of TPMI index and indication of DMRS port index of 8 antenna ports, and can reduce indication overhead.
下面从不同的方面介绍本申请，应理解的是，下面的不同方面的实施方式和有益效果可以互相参考。The present application is introduced from different aspects below, and it should be understood that the implementation modes and beneficial effects of the following different aspects can be referred to each other.
第一方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：网络设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。In a first aspect, this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending first indication information and second indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination. The number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination, for example, the second indication information indicates The number of DMRS port indexes is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
本申请使第一指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，不仅可以支持大于4天线端口(比如8天线端口)的传输层数(最大8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示，并且相比于一个值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的一个组合的方式，还减少了指示开销。本申请还将两个不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用不同的取值来指示不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引，不仅可以支持大于4天线端口(比如8天线端口)的DMRS端口索引的指示，还无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，也不会增加DMRS端口指示的比特开销，并可以减少DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余指示位。This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. It can not only support the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI greater than 4 antenna ports (such as 8 antenna ports) The combined indication of the index, and compared with a value indicating a combination of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, also reduces the indication overhead. This application also encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, using different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers. It can not only support more than 4 antenna ports (such as 8 antennas) There is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
第二方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收第一指示信息和第二指示信息，并根据该第二指示信息的值，从传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合中确定一个组合。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS 端口索引关联第一组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。In a second aspect, the present application provides an information indication method. The method includes: the terminal device receives first indication information and second indication information, and according to the value of the second indication information, selects a plurality of transmission layer numbers and TPMI indexes according to the value of the second indication information. Determine a combination within the combination. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS indicated by the second indication information The port index is associated with the first combination. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the first combination; when the second indication information is a value in the second set , the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
本申请实施例的终端设备通过第一指示信息的值，确定一个或多个rank值和这一个或多个rank值分别对应的TPMI索引，再根据第二指示信息的值，确定具体的(或者说唯一的)rank值和DMRS端口索引，进一步确定该rank值对应的TPMI索引。不仅可以支持大于4天线端口(比如8天线端口)的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示以及DMRS端口索引的指示，减少指示开销，还可以支持大于4层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。The terminal device in the embodiment of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the specific (or Talk about the unique) rank value and DMRS port index, and further determine the TPMI index corresponding to the rank value. Not only can it support the combined indication of the number of transmission layers and TPMI indexes greater than 4 antenna ports (such as 8 antenna ports), as well as the indication of DMRS port index, reducing the indication overhead, it can also support uplink transmission of greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一组合中的传输层数为1,2,3,4中的一个，第二组合中的传输层数为5,6,7,8中的一个。换句话说，第一组合中的传输层数和第二组合中的传输层数存在对应关系。Combined with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the number of transmission layers in the above-mentioned first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5. One of 6,7,8. In other words, there is a corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为5；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为8。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为8；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为5。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
本申请建立rank＝1～4与rank＝5～8的对应关系，基于该对应关系，使第一指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合；并且本申请将存在对应关系的两个rank对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用不同的取值来指示不同rank对应的DMRS端口索引；不仅可以支持8天线端口的传输层数(有1层到8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示以及8天线端口的DMRS端口索引指示，还可以在不影响兼容性的情况下，降低指示开销。This application establishes a corresponding relationship between rank=1~4 and rank=5~8. Based on this corresponding relationship, the first indication information has at least one value indicating multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index; and this application The DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have a corresponding relationship are encoded in a table, and different values are used to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different ranks; not only can the number of transmission layers of 8 antenna ports be supported (there are 1 layer to The combined indication of layer 8) and TPMI index and the DMRS port index indication of 8-antenna ports can also reduce the indication overhead without affecting compatibility.
结合第一方面或第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一指示信息和上述第二指示信息携带于下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)信令中。举例来说，该第一指示信息可以是DCI信令中的预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)字段，用于指示传输层数(即rank)和该传输层数对应的TPMI索引的组合；该第二指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口(antenna port)字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。In conjunction with the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information are carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling. For example, the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields in DCI signaling, used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI corresponding to the number of transmission layers. A combination of indexes; the second indication information may be the antenna port (antenna port) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
第三方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为网络设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a third aspect, this application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect. The communication device includes means for performing a method in the first aspect or in any possible implementation of the first aspect.
第四方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为终端设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. The communication device includes means for performing the method of the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
在第三方面或第四方面中，上述通信装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。对于收发单元和处理单元的具体描述还可以参考下文示出的装置实施例。上述第三方面到第四方面的有益效果可以参考前述第一方面和第二方面的相关描述，这里不赘述。In the third aspect or the fourth aspect, the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below. For the beneficial effects of the above third aspect to the fourth aspect, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect, and will not be described again here.
第五方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：网络设备发送第一指示信息和第三指示信息。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该第三指示信息指示这多个组合中的一个组合。In a fifth aspect, this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending first indication information and third indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The third indication information indicates one combination among the plurality of combinations.
本申请使第一指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，并通过第三指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个组合中的哪个组合；不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示，减少指示开销，还可以支持大于4层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and uses the third indication information to indicate which of the multiple combinations the network device allocates to the terminal device; It can not only support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing the indication overhead, but also support uplink transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。上述第三指示信息可以通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示该多个组合中的第一组合，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示这两个码字都使能来指示该多个组合中的第二组合。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination of the plurality of combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled, and the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination by indicating that both of the two codewords are enabled. The second combination of many.
可选的，该第三指示信息是DCI信令中的调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)字 段、冗余版本(redundancy version)字段以及新数据指示(new data indicator)字段中的一项或多项，比如该第三指示信息是MCS字段和冗余版本字段。示例性的，可以通过DCI信令中一个码字对应的MCS字段和冗余版本字段取值为预设值或特殊值，来表征该码字(codeword)没有被使能(disabled)。可理解，DCI信令中包含两个码字分别对应的MCS字段、冗余版本字段以及新数据指示字段。当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段取特殊值(如26)和这个码字对应的冗余版本字段取特殊值(如1)时，用于联合指示该码字(codeword)没有被使能(disabled)；而当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段不为26或这个码字对应的冗余版本字段不为1，则表示该码字被使能(enabled)，此时该码字对应的MCS字段用于指示调度的MCS索引，该码字对应的冗余版本字段用于指示调度的数据对应的编码的冗余版本信息。Optionally, the third indication information is a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) word in DCI signaling. One or more of a segment, a redundancy version field, and a new data indicator field. For example, the third indication information is an MCS field and a redundancy version field. For example, in DCI signaling, the value of the MCS field and the redundancy version field corresponding to a codeword can be a preset value or a special value to indicate that the codeword (codeword) is not enabled (disabled). It can be understood that the DCI signaling includes the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field respectively corresponding to the two codewords. When the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate that the codeword (codeword) has no is enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled). At this time, the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index, and the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：网络设备发送第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联上述多个组合中的第一组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联上述多个组合中的第二组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。Combined with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the network device sends second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination of the above multiple combinations, for example, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is The number is the same as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) in the first combination; when the value of the second indication information is the value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the DMRS port index in the above multiple combinations. For the second combination, for example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
本申请将两个不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用不同的取值来指示不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引，不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示，还无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，也不会增加DMRS端口指示的比特开销，并可以减少DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余指示位。This application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, and uses different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers. It can not only support DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports. Indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
第六方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收第一指示信息和第三指示信息，并根据该第三指示信息，从传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合中确定一个组合。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该第三指示信息指示这多个组合中的一个组合。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides an information indication method. The method includes: the terminal device receives first indication information and third indication information, and according to the third indication information, selects from multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. Decide on a combination. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The third indication information indicates one combination among the plurality of combinations.
本申请的终端设备通过第一指示信息的值，确定一个或多个rank值和这一个或多个rank值分别对应的TPMI索引，再根据第三指示信息的指示，确定唯一的rank值和该rank值对应的TPMI索引。不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数(最大8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示，减少指示开销，还可以支持大于4层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。The terminal device of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the unique rank value and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values according to the indication of the third indication information. The TPMI index corresponding to the rank value. It not only supports the combined indication of the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing the indication overhead, but also supports uplink transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合中确定一个组合，包括：当上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从该多个组合中确定第一组合；当第三指示信息指示该两个码字都使能时，终端设备从该多个组合中确定第二组合。In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The terminal device determines a combination from multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index according to the third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines a combination from The first combination is determined from the multiple combinations; when the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines the second combination from the multiple combinations.
可选的，该第三指示信息是DCI信令中的MCS字段、冗余版本字段以及新数据指示字段中的一项或多项，比如该第三指示信息是MCS字段和冗余版本字段。可理解，DCI信令中包含两个码字分别对应的MCS字段、冗余版本字段以及新数据指示字段。当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段取特殊值(如26)和这个码字对应的冗余版本字段取特殊值(如1)时，用于联合指示该码字(codeword)没有被使能(disabled)；而当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段不为26或这个码字对应的冗余版本字段不为1，则表示该码字被使能(enabled)，此时该码字对应的MCS字段用于指示调度的MCS索引，该码字对应的冗余版本字段用于指示调度的数据对应的编码的冗余版本信息。Optionally, the third indication information is one or more of the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field in DCI signaling. For example, the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version field. It can be understood that the DCI signaling includes the MCS field, the redundancy version field and the new data indication field respectively corresponding to the two codewords. When the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate that the codeword (codeword) has no is enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled). At this time, the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index, and the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：终端设备接收第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联上述多个组合中的第一组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联上述多个组合中的第二组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the terminal device receiving second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination of the above multiple combinations, for example, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is The number is the same as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) in the first combination; when the value of the second indication information is the value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the DMRS port index in the above multiple combinations. For the second combination, for example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) in the second combination.
结合第五方面或第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一组合中的传输层数为1,2,3,4中的一个，第二组合中的传输层数为5,6,7,8中的一个。换句话说，第一组合中的传输层数和第二组合中的传输层数存 在对应关系。Combined with the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the number of transmission layers in the above first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5. One of 6,7,8. In other words, the number of transport layers in the first combination and the number of transport layers in the second combination are stored in the corresponding relationship.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为5；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为8。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为8；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为5。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
结合第五方面或第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一指示信息携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第一指示信息可以是DCI信令中的预编码信息和层数字段，用于指示传输层数(即rank)和该传输层数对应的TPMI索引的组合。Combined with the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned first indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For example, the first indication information may be the precoding information and layer number field in DCI signaling, used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number (ie, rank) and the TPMI index corresponding to the transmission layer number.
第七方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为网络设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第五方面或第五方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第五方面或第五方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the fifth aspect or any possible implementation of the fifth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the fifth aspect or any possible implementation of the fifth aspect.
第八方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为终端设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第六方面或第六方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第六方面或第六方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the sixth aspect or any possible implementation of the sixth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the sixth aspect or any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
在第七方面或第八方面中，上述通信装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。对于收发单元和处理单元的具体描述还可以参考下文示出的装置实施例。上述第七方面到第八方面的有益效果可以参考前述第五方面和第六方面的相关描述，这里不赘述。In the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below. For the beneficial effects of the above seventh to eighth aspects, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing fifth and sixth aspects, and will not be described again here.
第九方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：网络设备发送第四指示信息和第三指示信息。其中，该第四指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。该第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引。该第三指示信息指示这多个DMRS端口索引组中的一个DMRS端口索引组。In a ninth aspect, this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fourth indication information and third indication information. The fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The fourth indication information has at least a second value, the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, and each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index. The third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
本申请使第四指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示多个DMRS端口索引组(每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引)，并通过第三指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个DMRS端口索引组中的哪个DMRS端口索引组；不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引指示，无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，也不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位，还可以支持大于4层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。This application makes the fourth indication information have at least one value, which value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups (each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index), and instructs the network device to allocate to the terminal device through the third indication information. Which DMRS port index group is among these multiple DMRS port index groups? Not only can it support DMRS port index indications greater than 4 antenna ports, there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, and it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and can reduce The redundancy indication bit can also support uplink transmission greater than layer 4, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第九方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个DMRS端口索引组包括第一DMRS端口索引组和第二DMRS端口索引组。上述第三指示信息通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第一DMRS端口索引组，上述第三指示信息通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第二DMRS端口索引组。In conjunction with the ninth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group. The above-mentioned third indication information indicates the first DMRS port index group among the above-mentioned multiple DMRS port index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled. The above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled. can indicate a second DMRS port index group among the plurality of DMRS port index groups.
可选的，该第三指示信息携带于DCI信令中，该第三指示信息的实现方式可参考上述第五或第六方面的描述，或者参考下文实施例的描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For implementation of the third indication information, refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
结合第九方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：网络设备发送第一指示信息。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。第一组合关联上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第一DMRS端口索引组，第二组合关联上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第二DMRS端口索引组。In conjunction with the ninth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the network device sends first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups, and the second combination is associated with the second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
第十方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收第四指示信息和第三指示信息，并根据第三指示信息，从该第四指示信息指示的多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。其中，该第四指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。该第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引。该第三指示信息指示这多个DMRS端口索引组中的一个DMRS端口索引组。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides an information indication method. The method includes: a terminal device receiving fourth indication information and third indication information, and indexing from multiple DMRS ports indicated by the fourth indication information according to the third indication information. Determine a DMRS port index group in the group. The fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The fourth indication information has at least a second value, the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, and each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index. The third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
本申请的终端设备通过第四指示信息的值，确定一个或多个DMRS端口索引组，再根据第三指示信息的指示，确定一个DMRS端口索引组。不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引指示，无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，也不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位，还可以支持大于4 层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。The terminal equipment of the present application determines one or more DMRS port index groups through the value of the fourth indication information, and then determines a DMRS port index group according to the indication of the third indication information. Not only can it support DMRS port index indication for more than 4 antenna ports, there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and it can reduce redundant indication bits. It can also support more than 4 antenna ports. layer of uplink transmission, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第十方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个DMRS端口索引组包括第一DMRS端口索引组和第二DMRS端口索引组。终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从该第四指示信息指示的多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组，包括：当上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从该多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第一DMRS端口索引组；当上述第三指示信息指示该两个码字都使能时，终端设备从该多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第二DMRS端口索引组。In conjunction with the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group. The terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups indicated by the fourth indication information according to the third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords uses When enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups; when the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups. Determine the second DMRS port index group.
可选的，该第三指示信息携带于DCI信令中，该第三指示信息的实现方式可参考上述第五或第六方面的描述，或者参考下文实施例的描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For implementation of the third indication information, refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
结合第十方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：终端设备接收第一指示信息，并根据上述第三指示信息，从该第一指示信息指示的传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合中确定一个组合。其中，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。第一组合关联上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第一DMRS端口索引组，第二组合关联上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第二DMRS端口索引组。In connection with the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the terminal device receives the first indication information, and according to the above third indication information, obtains the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index indicated by the first indication information. Determine one combination among multiple combinations. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the transmission layer number is the same as the layer number of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. The first indication information at least has a first value, and the first value indicates multiple combinations of a transport layer number and a TPMI index. A transport layer number and a TPMI index corresponding to the transport layer number are one combination. The plurality of combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups, and the second combination is associated with the second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
可选的，当上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从该多个组合中确定第一组合；当上述第三指示信息指示该两个码字都使能时，终端设备从该多个组合中确定第二组合。Optionally, when the above-mentioned third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first combination from the multiple combinations; when the above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled. When enabled, the terminal device determines the second combination from the multiple combinations.
本申请使第一指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，并通过第三指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个组合中的哪个组合；可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示，减少指示开销。This application allows the first indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and uses the third indication information to indicate which of the multiple combinations the network device allocates to the terminal device; It can support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports, reducing indication overhead.
结合第九方面或第十方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一组合中的传输层数为1,2,3,4中的一个，第二组合中的传输层数为5,6,7,8中的一个。换句话说，第一组合中的传输层数和第二组合中的传输层数存在对应关系。Combined with the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5. One of 6,7,8. In other words, there is a corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为5；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为8。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
可选的，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为8；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为5。Optionally, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
结合第九方面或第十方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第四指示信息携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第四指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。In conjunction with the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above fourth indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For example, the fourth indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
第十一方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为网络设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第九方面或第九方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第九方面或第九方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the ninth aspect or any possible implementation of the ninth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the ninth aspect or any possible implementation of the ninth aspect.
第十二方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为终端设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第十方面或第十方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第十方面或第十方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the tenth aspect or any possible implementation of the tenth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the tenth aspect or any possible implementation of the tenth aspect.
在第十一方面或第十二方面中，上述通信装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。对于收发单元和处理单元的具体描述还可以参考下文示出的装置实施例。上述第十一方面到第十二方面的有益效果可以参考前述第九方面和第十方面的相关描述，这里不赘述。In the eleventh or twelfth aspect, the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below. For the beneficial effects of the above eleventh to twelfth aspects, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing ninth and tenth aspects, and will not be described again here.
第十三方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：网络设备发送第五指示信息和第二指示信息。其中，该第五指示信息用于指示探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引。该多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一传输层数(即 rank)相同；当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二传输层数(即rank)相同。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fifth indication information and second indication information. Wherein, the fifth indication information is used to indicate a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates a plurality of SRS resource index groups. Each SRS resource The index group includes at least one SRS resource index. The plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. number of layers (i.e. rank); when the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information The same as the second transmission layer number (i.e. rank).
本申请使第五指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示多个SRS资源索引组(每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引)，不仅可以支持8天线端口的SRS资源索引指示，支持最大8层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能；并且相比于一个值指示一个SRS资源索引组的方式，还减少了指示开销。本申请还将两个不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用不同的取值来指示不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引，不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示，还无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，也不会增加DMRS端口指示的比特开销，并可以减少DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余指示位。This application allows the fifth indication information to have at least one value, which indicates multiple SRS resource index groups (each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index). It can not only support the SRS resource index indication of 8 antenna ports, but also support the maximum 8-layer non-codebook transmission, thereby improving transmission performance; and compared with the way in which a value indicates an SRS resource index group, the indication overhead is also reduced. This application also encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, using different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers, which can not only support DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports Indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
第十四方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收第五指示信息和第二指示信息，并根据该第二指示信息的值，从该第五指示信息指示的多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。其中，该第五指示信息用于指示SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引。该多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二传输层数(即rank)相同。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides an information indication method. The method includes: the terminal device receives fifth indication information and second indication information, and according to the value of the second indication information, obtains the information indicated by the fifth indication information. Determine one SRS resource index group among SRS resource index groups. The fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index. The plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. The number of layers (ie, rank) is the same; when the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the DMRS port indicated by the second indication information The number of indexes is the same as the number of second transport layers (ie, rank).
本申请的终端设备通过第五指示信息的值，确定一个或多个SRS资源索引组，再根据第二指示信息的值，确定具体的(或者说唯一的)SRS资源索引组；可以支持大于4个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示，从而支持大于4层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能。The terminal equipment of this application determines one or more SRS resource index groups through the value of the fifth indication information, and then determines a specific (or unique) SRS resource index group based on the value of the second indication information; it can support more than 4 SRS resource index indication of each SRS resource, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第十三方面或第十四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，上述第二传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。In conjunction with the thirteenth aspect or the fourteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the number of the first transmission layers is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of the second transmission layers is 5, 6, or 7. , one of 8.
可选的，第一传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，第二传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。举例来说，当第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为5；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层数为3时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为8。Optionally, the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8. For example, when the first transmission layer number is 1, the second transmission layer number is 5; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6; when the first transmission layer number is 3, The second transmission layer number is 7; when the first transmission layer number is 4, the second transmission layer number is 8.
可选的，第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为8；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为3时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为5。Optionally, when the number of the first transmission layer is 1, the number of the second transmission layer is 8; when the number of the first transmission layer is 2, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7. The number of the second transmission layer is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5.
结合第十三方面或第十四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第五指示信息和上述第二指示信息可以携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第五指示信息可以是DCI信令中的SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator，SRI)字段，用于指示SRS资源索引；该第二指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。In conjunction with the thirteenth aspect or the fourteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in DCI signaling. For example, the fifth indication information may be the SRS resource indicator (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index; the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling. , used to indicate the DMRS port index.
第十五方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为网络设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第十三方面或第十三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第十三方面或第十三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a fifteenth aspect, this application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein. The communication device is used to perform the method in the thirteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the thirteenth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the thirteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the thirteenth aspect.
第十六方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为终端设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第十四方面或第十四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第十四方面或第十四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a sixteenth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein. The communication device is used to perform the method in the fourteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the fourteenth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the fourteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the fourteenth aspect.
在第十五方面或第十六方面中，上述通信装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。对于收发单元和处理单元的具体描述还可以参考下文示出的装置实施例。上述第十五方面到第十六方面的有益效果可以参考前述第十三方面和第十四方面的相关描述，这里不赘述。In the fifteenth or sixteenth aspect, the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below. For the beneficial effects of the fifteenth to sixteenth aspects mentioned above, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of the thirteenth and fourteenth aspects mentioned above, and will not be described again here.
第十七方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：网络设备发送第五指示信息和第三指示信息。其中，该第五指示信息用于指示SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引。该第三指示信息指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的一个SRS资源索引组。In a seventeenth aspect, this application provides an information indication method, which method includes: a network device sending fifth indication information and third indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index. The third indication information indicates an SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
本申请使第五指示信息至少存在一个值，该值指示多个SRS资源索引组(每个SRS资源索引组包括 至少一个SRS资源索引)，并通过第三指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个SRS资源索引组中的哪个SRS资源索引组；不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的SRS资源索引指示，支持大于4层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能；并且相比于一个值指示一个SRS资源索引组的方式，还减少了指示开销。This application allows the fifth indication information to have at least one value, which value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups (each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index), and indicates which SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups the network device allocates to the terminal device through the third indication information; not only can it support SRS resource index indications greater than 4 antenna ports, Supports non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance; and compared with the method of indicating an SRS resource index group with a value, the indication overhead is also reduced.
结合第十七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。上述第三指示信息通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的第一SRS资源索引组，上述第三指示信息通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的第二SRS资源索引组。In conjunction with the seventeenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The above-mentioned third indication information indicates the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled. The above-mentioned third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled. can indicate a second SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
可选的，该第三指示信息携带于DCI信令中，该第三指示信息的实现方式可参考上述第五或第六方面的描述，或者参考下文实施例的描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, the third indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For implementation of the third indication information, refer to the description of the fifth or sixth aspect above, or refer to the description of the embodiment below, which will not be described again here.
结合第十七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：网络设备发送第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二传输层数(即rank)相同。上述多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数。Combined with the seventeenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the network device sends second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. The number of transmission layers (ie, rank) is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the second indication information The number of indicated DMRS port indexes is the same as the second transmission layer number (ie, rank). The plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
本申请将两个不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用不同的取值来指示不同传输层数对应的DMRS端口索引，可以支持大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示，还无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，也不会增加DMRS端口指示的比特开销，并可以减少DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余指示位。This application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to two different transmission layer numbers in a table, uses different values to indicate the DMRS port indexes corresponding to different transmission layer numbers, and can support the indication of DMRS port indexes greater than 4 antenna ports. , there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port indication, and it can reduce redundant indication bits in the DMRS port index table.
第十八方面，本申请提供一种信息指示方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收第五指示信息和第三指示信息，并根据该第三指示信息，从该第五指示信息指示的多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。其中，该第五指示信息用于指示SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引。该第三指示信息指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的一个SRS资源索引组。In an eighteenth aspect, the present application provides an information indication method. The method includes: a terminal device receiving fifth indication information and third indication information, and according to the third indication information, selecting multiple SRSs indicated by the fifth indication information. Determine an SRS resource index group in the resource index group. The fifth indication information is used to indicate an SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index. The third indication information indicates an SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
本申请的终端设备通过第五指示信息的值，确定一个或多个SRS资源索引组，再根据第三指示信息的指示，确定一个SRS资源索引组；可以支持大于4天线端口的SRS资源索引指示，支持大于4层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能。The terminal equipment of this application determines one or more SRS resource index groups through the value of the fifth indication information, and then determines an SRS resource index group according to the indication of the third indication information; it can support SRS resource index indications of more than 4 antenna ports. , supports non-codebook transmission greater than 4 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
结合第十八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。终端设备根据上述第三指示信息，从该第五指示信息指示的多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组，包括：当上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从该多个SRS资源索引组中确定第一SRS资源索引组；当上述第三指示信息指示该两个码字都使能时，终端设备从该多个SRS资源索引组中确定第二SRS资源索引组。In conjunction with the eighteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups indicated by the fifth indication information according to the above third indication information, including: when the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords uses When enabled, the terminal equipment determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups; when the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal equipment determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups. Determine the second SRS resource index group.
结合第十八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：终端设备接收第二指示信息。该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一传输层数(即rank)相同；当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二传输层数(即rank)相同。上述多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数。In conjunction with the eighteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the terminal device receiving second indication information. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first transmission layer number. The number of transmission layers (ie, rank) is the same; when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second transmission layer number, for example, the second indication information The number of indicated DMRS port indexes is the same as the second transmission layer number (ie, rank). The plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer.
结合第十七方面或第十八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，上述第二传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。In conjunction with the seventeenth aspect or the eighteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the number of the above-mentioned first transmission layers is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of the above-mentioned second transmission layers is 5, 6, or 7 , one of 8.
可选的，第一传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，第二传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。举例来说，当第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为5；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层 数为3时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为8。Optionally, the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8. For example, when the first transport layer number is 1, the second transport layer number is 5; when the first transport layer number is 2, the second transport layer number is 6; when the first transport layer When the number is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 8.
可选的，第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为8；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为3时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为5。Optionally, when the number of the first transmission layer is 1, the number of the second transmission layer is 8; when the number of the first transmission layer is 2, the number of the second transmission layer is 7; when the number of the first transmission layer is 3, the number of the second transmission layer is 7. The number of the second transmission layer is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5.
结合第十七方面或第十八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第五指示信息携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第五指示信息可以是DCI信令中的SRS资源指示(SRI)字段。In conjunction with the seventeenth aspect or the eighteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the fifth indication information is carried in DCI signaling. For example, the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling.
第十九方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为网络设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第十七方面或第十七方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第十七方面或第十七方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a nineteenth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a network device or a chip therein. The communication device is configured to perform the method in the seventeenth aspect or any possible implementation of the seventeenth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the seventeenth aspect or any possible implementation of the seventeenth aspect.
第二十方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置具体为终端设备或其中的芯片，该通信装置用于执行第十八方面或第十八方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该通信装置包括具有执行第十八方面或第十八方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a twentieth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which is specifically a terminal device or a chip therein. The communication device is used to perform the method in the eighteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the eighteenth aspect. The communication device includes a unit having a method for performing the eighteenth aspect or any possible implementation of the eighteenth aspect.
在第十九方面或第二十方面中，上述通信装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。对于收发单元和处理单元的具体描述还可以参考下文示出的装置实施例。上述第十九方面到第二十方面的有益效果可以参考前述第十七方面和第十八方面的相关描述，这里不赘述。In the nineteenth or twentieth aspect, the above-mentioned communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit. For specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference may also be made to the device embodiments shown below. For the beneficial effects of the nineteenth to twentieth aspects, please refer to the relevant descriptions of the seventeenth and eighteenth aspects, and will not be described again here.
第二十一方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置为网络设备，该通信装置包括处理器，用于执行上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。或者，该处理器用于执行存储器中存储的程序，当该程序被执行时，上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-first aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device is a network device. The communication device includes a processor for executing the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, and the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect. aspect, the seventeenth aspect above, or the method shown in any possible implementation of any one of the aspects. Alternatively, the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory. When the program is executed, the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect, or any of them Any possible implementation of the method shown in one aspect is performed.
结合第二十一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，存储器位于上述通信装置之外。In conjunction with the twenty-first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the memory is located outside the above-mentioned communication device.
结合第二十一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，存储器位于上述通信装置之内。In conjunction with the twenty-first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the memory is located within the above-mentioned communication device.
本申请中，处理器和存储器还可以集成于一个器件中，即处理器和存储器还可以被集成在一起。In this application, the processor and the memory can also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory can also be integrated together.
结合第二十一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置还包括收发器，该收发器，用于发送指示信息。In conjunction with the twenty-first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver is used to send indication information.
第二十二方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置为终端设备，该通信装置包括处理器，用于执行上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。或者，该处理器用于执行存储器中存储的程序，当该程序被执行时，上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-second aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device is a terminal device. The communication device includes a processor for executing the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, and the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect. aspect, the eighteenth aspect above, or the method shown in any possible implementation of any one of the aspects. Alternatively, the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory. When the program is executed, the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any of them Any possible implementation of the method shown in one aspect is performed.
结合第二十二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，存储器位于上述通信装置之外。In conjunction with the twenty-second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the memory is located outside the above-mentioned communication device.
结合第二十二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，存储器位于上述通信装置之内。In conjunction with the twenty-second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the memory is located within the above-mentioned communication device.
本申请中，处理器和存储器还可以集成于一个器件中，即处理器和存储器还可以被集成在一起。In this application, the processor and the memory can also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory can also be integrated together.
结合第二十二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置还包括收发器，该收发器，用于接收指示信息。In conjunction with the twenty-second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver is used to receive indication information.
第二十三方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括逻辑电路和接口，该逻辑电路和该接口耦合。In a twenty-third aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit is coupled to the interface.
一种设计中，逻辑电路，用于生成第一指示信息和第二指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当该第二指示信息的值为该第一集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联该第一组合，当该第二指示信息的值为该第二集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联该第二组合；接口，用于输出该第一指示信息和该第二指示信息。In one design, the logic circuit is used to generate first indication information and second indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index. The transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. An indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination; the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port The index is associated with the first combination. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination; an interface is used to output the first indication information and the second indication. information.
一种设计中，逻辑电路，用于生成第一指示信息和第三指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和发送预编码矩阵指示TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合；该第三指示信息指示该多个组合中的一个组合；接口，用于输出该第一指示信息和该第三指示信息。In one design, the logic circuit is used to generate first indication information and third indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and the combination of the transmission precoding matrix indicating TPMI index. The number of transmission layers and the TPMI Corresponding to the index, the first indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index; the third indication information indicates one of the multiple combinations; the interface is used for output the first instruction information and the third instruction information.
一种设计中，逻辑电路，用于生成第四指示信息和第三指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示解调参考 信号DMRS端口索引，该第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引；该第三指示信息指示该多个DMRS端口索引组中的一个DMRS端口索引组；接口，用于输出该第四指示信息和该第三指示信息。In one design, the logic circuit is used to generate fourth indication information and third indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference Signal DMRS port index, the fourth indication information has at least a second value, the second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index; the third indication information indicates the multiple A DMRS port index group in the DMRS port index group; an interface used to output the fourth indication information and the third indication information.
一种设计中，逻辑电路，用于生成第五指示信息和第二指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；该第二指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引；该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当该第二指示信息为该第一集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，当该第二指示信息为该第二集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数；其中，该多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组，该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于该第一传输层数，该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于该第二传输层数；接口，用于输出该第五指示信息和该第二指示信息。In one design, the logic circuit is used to generate fifth indication information and second indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value, and the first The value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets One of the plurality of sets at least includes a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number. When the second indication information When it is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number; wherein the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group, and the first SRS resource The number of SRS resource indexes included in the index group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer; the interface is used to output the fifth indication. information and the second instruction information.
一种设计中，逻辑电路，用于生成第五指示信息和第三指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；该第三指示信息指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的一个SRS资源索引组；接口，用于输出该第五指示信息和该第三指示信息。In one design, the logic circuit is used to generate fifth indication information and third indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value, and the first The value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the third indication information indicates one SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups; the interface is used to output the third five instruction information and the third instruction information.
第二十四方面，本申请提供另一种通信装置，该通信装置包括逻辑电路和接口，该逻辑电路和该接口耦合。In a twenty-fourth aspect, the present application provides another communication device. The communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit is coupled to the interface.
一种设计中，接口，用于输入第一指示信息和第二指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；该第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当该第二指示信息的值为该第一集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联该第一组合，当该第二指示信息的值为该第二集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联该第二组合；逻辑电路，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个组合中确定一个组合。In one design, the interface is used to input first indication information and second indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index. The number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index. The first The indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination; the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the The value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index Associated with the first combination, when the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination; a logic circuit configured to select from multiple Determine a combination within the combination.
一种设计中，接口，用于输入第一指示信息和第三指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和发送预编码矩阵指示TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，该第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合；逻辑电路，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个组合中确定一个组合。In one design, the interface is used to input first indication information and third indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate the number of transmission layers and the combination of the transmission precoding matrix indication TPMI index. The number of transmission layers and the TPMI index. Correspondingly, the first indication information at least has a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index; the logic circuit is used to determine one combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
一种设计中，接口，用于输入第四指示信息和第三指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引，该第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引；逻辑电路，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。In one design, the interface is used to input fourth indication information and third indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index, the fourth indication information has at least a second value, and the second The value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each DMRS port index group including at least one DMRS port index; the logic circuit is used to determine a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the third indication information.
一种设计中，接口，用于输入第五指示信息和第二指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；该第二指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引；该第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当该第二指示信息为该第一集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，当该第二指示信息为该第二集合中的值时，该DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数；其中，该多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组，该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于该第一传输层数，该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于该第二传输层数；逻辑电路，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。In one design, the interface is used to input fifth indication information and second indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value Indicate multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets One, the plurality of sets at least include a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number. When the second indication information is When the value in the second set is the value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number; wherein the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group, and the first SRS resource index The number of SRS resource indexes included in the group is equal to the number of the first transmission layer, and the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the number of the second transmission layer; the logic circuit is used to perform the operation according to the second indication information. The value determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
一种设计中，接口，用于输入第五指示信息和第三指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源索引，该第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；逻辑电路，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。In one design, the interface is used to input fifth indication information and third indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the sounding reference signal SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value Indicate multiple SRS resource index groups, each SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the logic circuit is used to determine an SRS resource index group from the multiple SRS resource index groups according to the third indication information.
第二十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上 述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, The above-mentioned ninth aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, and above The method shown in the seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any aspect therein, is executed.
第二十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-sixth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, and the above-mentioned The method shown in the tenth aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
第二十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码，当其在计算机上运行时，使得上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-seventh aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. The computer program product includes a computer program or computer code. When run on a computer, the computer program product enables the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, and the above-mentioned ninth aspect. The method shown in the aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
第二十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码，当其在计算机上运行时，使得上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-eighth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. The computer program product includes a computer program or computer code. When run on a computer, the computer program product enables the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, and the above-mentioned tenth aspect. The method shown in the aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects is executed.
第二十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序，该计算机程序在计算机上运行时，上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twenty-ninth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, and the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect The method shown in any aspect, or any possible implementation of any of the aspects, is executed.
第三十方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序，该计算机程序在计算机上运行时，上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a thirtieth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, and the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect , or the method shown in any possible implementation of either aspect is executed.
第三十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种无线通信***，该无线通信***包括网络设备和终端设备，所述网络设备用于执行上述第一方面、上述第五方面、上述第九方面、上述第十三方面、上述第十七方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法，所述终端设备用于执行上述第二方面、上述第六方面、上述第十方面、上述第十四方面、上述第十八方面、或其中任一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。In a thirty-first aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system includes a network device and a terminal device. The network device is configured to perform the above-mentioned first aspect, the above-mentioned fifth aspect, the above-mentioned ninth aspect, The method shown in the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, the above-mentioned seventeenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects, the terminal device is used to execute the above-mentioned second aspect, the above-mentioned sixth aspect, the above-mentioned tenth aspect, The method shown in the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect, the above-mentioned eighteenth aspect, or any possible implementation of any one of the aspects.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍。In order to explain the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, the drawings needed to be used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below.
图1是本申请实施例提供的通信***的架构示意图；Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的UE和基站的简化结构示意图；Figure 2 is a simplified structural diagram of a UE and a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的非码本的上行传输流程示意图；Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the non-codebook uplink transmission process provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第一种流程示意图；Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of the first information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第二种流程示意图；Figure 5 is a second flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第三种流程示意图；Figure 6 is a third flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第四种流程示意图；Figure 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第五种流程示意图；Figure 8 is a fifth flow diagram of the information indication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一结构示意图；Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的结构示意图；Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一结构示意图。Figure 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b，或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c；a和b；a和c；b和c；或a和b和c。其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。In the embodiments of this application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. “At least one of the following” or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c; a and b; a and c; b and c; or a, b, and c. Among them, a, b, c can be single or multiple.
在本申请的描述中，“第一”、“第二”等字样仅用于区别不同对象，并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。此外，术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形，意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、***、产品或设备等，没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元，而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元等，或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备等固有的其它步骤或单元。In the description of this application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used to distinguish different objects and do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as "first" and "second" are not limiting. It must be different. Furthermore, the terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or equipment that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes unlisted steps or units, or optional It also includes other steps or units inherent to these processes, methods, products or equipment.
本申请中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”、“举例来说”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选 或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”、“举例来说”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。In this application, the words "exemplary" or "such as" are used to mean examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described herein as "exemplary,""forexample," or "such as" is not intended to be construed as preferred over other embodiments or designs. Or more advantageous. Rather, use of the words "exemplary,""forexample," or "such as" is intended to present the concept in a concrete manner.
应理解，在本申请中，“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下装置会做出相应的处理，并非是限定时间，且也不要求装置实现时一定要有判断的动作，也不意味着存在其它限定。It should be understood that in this application, "when", "if" and "if" all mean that the device will perform corresponding processing under certain objective circumstances. They do not limit the time, nor do they require the device to be implemented. There must be an act of judgment, and it does not mean that there are other limitations.
本申请中的“同时”可以理解为在相同的时间点，也可以理解为在一段时间段内，还可以理解为在同一个周期内，具体可以结合上下文进行理解。“At the same time” in this application can be understood as at the same point in time, within a period of time, or within the same cycle. Specifically, it can be understood based on the context.
本申请中对于使用单数表示的元素旨在用于表示“一个或多个”，而并非表示“一个且仅一个”，除非有特别说明。Elements referred to in the singular in this application are intended to mean "one or more" and not "one and only one" unless otherwise specified.
另外，本文中术语“***”和“网络”可互换替换使用。Additionally, the terms "system" and "network" are used interchangeably herein.
应理解，在本申请各实施例中，“与A对应的B”表示B与A相关联，根据A可以确定B。但还应理解，根据A确定B并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。It should be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, "B corresponding to A" means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined based on A. However, it should also be understood that determining B based on A does not mean determining B only based on A. B can also be determined based on A and/or other information.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种无线接入技术(radio access technology，RAT)的通信***中，例如：长期演进(longtermevolution，LTE)***，全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信***，第五代(5th Generation，5G)***，如新一代无线接入技术(new radio access technology，NR)通信***，LTE通信***与5G通信***之间的过渡***(该过渡***也可以称为4.5G通信***)，多种***融合的网络，物联网***，车联网***等；当然也可以是未来的通信***，如第六代(6th generation，6G)甚至第七代(7th generation，7G)***等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various radio access technology (RAT) communication systems, such as: longterm evolution (LTE) system, global interoperability for microwave access (worldwide interoperability for microwave access) , WiMAX) communication system, fifth generation (5th Generation, 5G) system, such as new generation wireless access technology (new radio access technology, NR) communication system, transition system between LTE communication system and 5G communication system (the transition system The system can also be called 4.5G communication system), a network integrating multiple systems, the Internet of Things system, the Internet of Vehicles system, etc.; of course it can also be a future communication system, such as the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) or even the seventh generation (7th generation, 7G) system, etc.
应理解，本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着通信网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。It should be understood that the network architecture and business scenarios described in the embodiments of this application are for the purpose of more clearly explaining the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. As those of ordinary skill in the art will know, With the evolution of communication network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
本申请实施例中部分场景以无线通信网络中NR网络的场景为例进行说明，应理解，本申请实施例中的方案还可以应用于其他无线通信网络中，相应的名称也可以用其他无线通信网络中的对应功能的名称进行替代。Some scenarios in the embodiments of this application are explained using the NR network scenario in a wireless communication network as an example. It should be understood that the solutions in the embodiments of this application can also be applied to other wireless communication networks, and the corresponding names can also be used in other wireless communication networks. Replace with the name of the corresponding function in the network.
参见图1，图1是本申请实施例提供的通信***的架构示意图。如图1所示，该通信***包括一个或多个网络设备(如图1中的基站)和一个或多个终端设备(如图1中的UE)。其中，终端设备与网络设备之间可以进行无线通信，一个终端设备可以与一个网络设备或同时与多个网络设备进行上行传输，一个网络设备也可以与一个终端设备或同时与多个终端设备进行下行传输。对于上行传输而言，终端设备可配置一个或多个天线，用于收发数据/信息；网络设备可配置多个天线，用于收发数据/信息。应理解，网络设备和终端设备还可包括与数据/信息发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如，处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器或解复用器等)。还应理解，图1仅是示意图，该通信***中还可以包括其它设备，如还可以包括核心网设备、无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备等，在图1中未画出。Referring to Figure 1, Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the communication system includes one or more network devices (base stations in Figure 1) and one or more terminal devices (UEs in Figure 1). Among them, wireless communication can be carried out between terminal equipment and network equipment. One terminal equipment can perform uplink transmission with one network equipment or with multiple network equipment at the same time. One network equipment can also perform uplink transmission with one terminal equipment or with multiple terminal equipment at the same time. Downstream transmission. For uplink transmission, the terminal device can be configured with one or more antennas for sending and receiving data/information; the network equipment can be configured with multiple antennas for sending and receiving data/information. It should be understood that network equipment and terminal equipment may also include multiple components related to data/information transmission and reception (eg, processors, modulators, multiplexers, demodulators or demultiplexers, etc.). It should also be understood that Figure 1 is only a schematic diagram, and the communication system may also include other equipment, such as core network equipment, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment, etc., which are not shown in Figure 1 .
可选的，本申请实施例中的网络设备包括接入网设备，例如基站(base station，BS)。接入网络设备可以是为终端提供接入的设备，可以包括无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)设备和接入节点(access node，AN)设备。RAN设备主要是3GPP网络中的无线网络设备，AN设备可以是非3GPP定义的接入网络设备。RAN设备，主要负责空口侧的无线资源管理、服务质量(quality of service，QoS)管理、数据压缩和加密等功能。RAN设备可以包括各种形式的基站，例如宏基站，微基站(也可称为小站)，中继站，接入点，气球站等。在采用不同的无线接入技术的***中，具备基站功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同，例如，在LTE***、第五代(5th generation，5G)、第六代(6th generation，6G)甚至第七代(7th generation，7G)***中，网络设备可称为：RAN或者下一代基站(next-generation Node basestation，gNB)、演进的节点B(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)、网络设备控制器(base station controller，BSC)、网络设备收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭网络设备(例如，home evolved Node B，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)，无线保真(wireless fidelity，WIFI)***中的接入点(access point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、收发节点(transmission and reception point，TRP)、传输点(transmission point，TP)等；或者5G***中的网络设备的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，或，车联网(vehicle to everything，V2X)或者智能驾驶场景中的路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。Optionally, the network equipment in this embodiment of the present application includes access network equipment, such as a base station (BS). Access network equipment may be equipment that provides access to terminals, and may include wireless access network (radio access network, RAN) equipment and access node (access node, AN) equipment. RAN equipment is mainly wireless network equipment in the 3GPP network, and AN equipment can be non-3GPP-defined access network equipment. RAN equipment is mainly responsible for wireless resource management, quality of service (QoS) management, data compression and encryption on the air interface side. RAN equipment can include various forms of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, balloon stations, etc. In systems using different wireless access technologies, the names of equipment with base station functions may be different, for example, in LTE systems, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G), sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) Even in the seventh generation (7G) system, network equipment can be called: RAN or next-generation Node base station (gNB), evolved Node B (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), network equipment control Controller (base station controller, BSC), network equipment transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home network equipment (for example, home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transceiver node (transmission and reception point, TRP), transmission point (TP) in the wireless fidelity (WIFI) system etc.; or one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) of antenna panels of network equipment in a 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), or vehicle to everything (V2X) or road side unit (RSU) in intelligent driving scenarios.
可理解，本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备；也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***、或通信模块、或调制解调器等，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备，以网络设备是基站为 例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。基站可以支持相同或不同接入技术的网络。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。It can be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device; it may also be a device that can support the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, a communication module, or a modem, etc. The device Can be installed on network equipment. In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the device for realizing the functions of the network device is a network device, and the network device is a base station. Examples are provided to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application. Base stations can support networks with the same or different access technologies. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
在一些部署中，gNB或传输点可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和DU等。gNB或传输点还可以包括射频单元(radio unit，RU)。CU实现gNB或传输点的部分功能，DU实现gNB或传输点的部分功能，比如，CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能，DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成物理层的信息，或者，由物理层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令或PDCP层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU+RU发送的。可以理解的是，网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。可选的，网络设备也可以为辅助通信设备，如卫星。In some deployments, gNBs or transmission points may include centralized units (CUs), DUs, etc. The gNB or transmission point may also include a radio unit (RU). CU implements part of the functions of gNB or transmission point, and DU implements part of the functions of gNB or transmission point. For example, CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer Function, DU implements the functions of wireless link control (radio link control, RLC), media access control (media access control, MAC) and physical (physical, PHY) layer. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the physical layer, or be transformed from the information of the physical layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PDCP layer signaling, can also It is considered to be sent by DU, or sent by DU+RU. It can be understood that the network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. Optionally, the network device can also be an auxiliary communication device, such as a satellite.
可选的，本申请实施例中的终端设备还可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、用户终端设备(customer premise equipment，CPE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、接入终端设备、车载终端、工业控制终端、UE单元、UE站、远方站、远程终端设备、移动设备、UE代理或UE装置等。终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载；也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等)；还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、车载终端设备、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、可穿戴终端设备等等。终端设备可以是固定的或者移动的。Optionally, the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be called a terminal, user equipment (user equipment, UE), customer premise equipment (CPE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal ( mobile terminal (MT), access terminal equipment, vehicle terminal, industrial control terminal, UE unit, UE station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile device, UE agent or UE device, etc. Terminal equipment is a device with wireless transceiver functions that can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites, etc.). The terminal device can be a mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer (Pad), computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality (VR) terminal device, augmented reality (AR) terminal device, industrial control (industrial control) ), wireless terminals in vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, wireless terminals in driverless driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, and wireless terminals in transportation safety , wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wearable terminal devices, etc. Terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile.
可理解，本申请实施例中，用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端；也可以是能够支持终端实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***、或通信模块、或调制解调器等，该装置可以被安装在终端中。本申请实施例中，芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端，以终端是UE为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system, a communication module, or a modem, etc., and the device may be installed in the terminal. In the embodiments of this application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the device for realizing the function of the terminal is a terminal, and the terminal is a UE as an example to describe the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the terminal equipment.
一些场景中，UE也可以用于充当基站。例如，UE可以充当调度实体，其在车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)、设备到设备(device-to-device，D2D)或点对点(peer to peer，P2P)等中的UE之间提供侧行链路信号。In some scenarios, the UE can also be used as a base station. For example, the UE can act as a scheduling entity between UEs in vehicle-to-everything (V2X), device-to-device (D2D) or peer-to-peer (P2P), etc. Provides sidelink signals.
一些场景中，UE也可以用于充当中继节点。例如：UE可以充当中继设备(relay)，或者接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul，IAB)节点，用于为终端设备提供无线回传服务。In some scenarios, the UE can also be used to act as a relay node. For example, the UE can act as a relay device or an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node to provide wireless backhaul services for terminal devices.
在本申请实施例中，术语“无线通信”还可以简称为“通信”，术语“通信”还可以描述为“数据传输”、“信息传输”或“传输”。In the embodiments of this application, the term "wireless communication" may also be referred to as "communication", and the term "communication" may also be described as "data transmission", "information transmission" or "transmission".
参见图2，图2是本申请实施例提供的UE和基站的简化结构示意图。为简单起见，图2仅示出了基站110和UE 120中的主要部件，实际应用中，基站和UE的结构可多于图2所示部件，也可少于图2所示部件，还可只包含图2所示部件。下面分别对图2中的各个组成部分进行简单介绍。Refer to Figure 2, which is a simplified structural diagram of a UE and a base station provided by an embodiment of the present application. For the sake of simplicity, Figure 2 only shows the main components in the base station 110 and the UE 120. In actual applications, the structures of the base station and the UE may have more components than those shown in Figure 2, or may have fewer components than those shown in Figure 2, or they may Contains only the parts shown in Figure 2. Below is a brief introduction to each component in Figure 2.
基站110包括接口111和处理器112。处理器112可选地可以存储程序114。基站110可选地包括存储器113。存储器113可选地可以存储程序115。UE 120包括接口121和处理器122。处理器122可选地可以存储程序124。UE 120可选地包括存储器123。存储器123可选地可以存储程序125。这些组件一起工作，以提供本申请中描述的各种功能。例如，处理器112和接口111一起工作以提供基站110与UE 120之间的无线连接。处理器122和接口121共同作用，实现UE 120的下行传输和/或上行传输。Base station 110 includes an interface 111 and a processor 112. Processor 112 may optionally store programs 114 . Base station 110 optionally includes memory 113. Memory 113 may optionally store programs 115 . UE 120 includes interface 121 and processor 122. Processor 122 may optionally store programs 124. UE 120 optionally includes memory 123. Memory 123 may optionally store programs 125 . These components work together to provide the various functionality described in this application. For example, processor 112 and interface 111 work together to provide a wireless connection between base station 110 and UE 120. The processor 122 and the interface 121 work together to implement downlink transmission and/or uplink transmission of the UE 120.
处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可包括一个或多个处理器并实现为计算设备的组合。处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可分别包括以下一种或多种：微处理器、微控制器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、数字信号处理设备(digital signal processing device，DSPD)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device，PLD)、选通逻辑、晶体管逻辑、分立硬件电路、处理电路或其它合适的硬件、固件和/或硬件和软件的组合，用于执行本申请中所描述的各种功能。处理器(例如，处理器112和/或处理器122)可以是通用处理器或专用处理器。例如，处理器112和/或处理器122可以是基带处理器或中央处理器。基带处理器可用于处理通信协议和通信数据。中央处理器可用于使基站110和/或UE 120执行软件程序，并处理软件程序中的数据。 A processor (eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) may include one or more processors and be implemented as a combination of computing devices. The processor (e.g., processor 112 and/or processor 122) may each include one or more of the following: a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a digital signal processor (DSP), a digital signal processing device ( digital signal processing device (DSPD), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), programmable logic device (PLD), gated logic, Transistor logic, discrete hardware circuits, processing circuits, or other suitable hardware, firmware, and/or combinations of hardware and software to perform the various functions described herein. A processor (eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor. For example, processor 112 and/or processor 122 may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit may be used to cause the base station 110 and/or the UE 120 to execute software programs and process data in the software programs.
接口(例如，接口111和/或121)可包括用于实现与一个或多个计算机设备(例如，UE、BS和/或网络节点)之间的通信。在一些实施例中，接口可以包括用于耦合有线连接的电线、或用于耦合无线收发器的管脚、或用于无线连接的芯片和/或管脚。在一些实施例中，接口可以包括发射器、接收器、收发器和/或天线。接口可以被配置为使用任何可用的协议(例如3GPP标准)。Interfaces (eg, interfaces 111 and/or 121) may include functions for enabling communication with one or more computer devices (eg, UEs, BSs, and/or network nodes). In some embodiments, the interface may include wires for coupling a wired connection, or pins for coupling a wireless transceiver, or chips and/or pins for a wireless connection. In some embodiments, an interface may include a transmitter, receiver, transceiver, and/or antenna. The interface can be configured to use any available protocol (eg 3GPP standards).
本申请中的程序在广义上用于表示软件。软件的非限制性示例是程序代码、程序、子程序、指令、指令集、代码、代码段、软件模块、应用程序、软件应用程序等。程序可以在处理器和/或计算机中运行，以使基站110和/或UE 120执行本申请中描述的各种功能和/或过程。Program in this application is used in a broad sense to mean software. Non-limiting examples of software are program code, programs, subroutines, instructions, sets of instructions, codes, code segments, software modules, applications, software applications, and the like. The program may run in the processor and/or computer to cause the base station 110 and/or the UE 120 to perform various functions and/or processes described in this application.
内存(例如存储器113和/或存储器123)可存储由处理器112、122在执行软件时操纵的数据。存储器113、123可以使用任何存储技术实现。例如，存储器可以是处理器和/或计算机能够访问的任何可用存储介质。存储介质的非限制性示例包括：RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM、可移动介质、光盘存储器、磁盘存储介质、磁存储设备、闪存、寄存器、状态存储器、远程挂载存储器、本地或远程存储器组件，或能够携带或存储软件、数据或信息并可由处理器/计算机访问的任何其它介质。Memory (eg, memory 113 and/or memory 123) may store data manipulated by processors 112, 122 when executing software. Memories 113, 123 may be implemented using any storage technology. For example, memory may be any available storage medium accessible to the processor and/or computer. Non-limiting examples of storage media include: RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, removable media, optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media, magnetic storage devices, flash memory, registers, state memory, remote mount memory, local or remote memory component, or any other medium capable of carrying or storing software, data or information and accessible by a processor/computer.
内存(例如存储器113和/或存储器123)和处理器(例如处理器112和/或处理器122)可以分开设置或集成在一起。存储器可以用于与处理器连接，使得处理器能够从存储器中读取信息，在存储器中存储和/或写入信息。存储器113可以集成在处理器112中。存储器123可以集成在处理器122中。处理器(例如处理器112和/或处理器122)和存储器(例如存储器113和/或存储器123)可以设置在集成电路中(例如，该集成电路可以设置在UE或基站或其他网络节点中)。Memory (eg, memory 113 and/or memory 123) and processor (eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) may be provided separately or integrated together. The memory may be used in connection with the processor to enable the processor to read information from the memory, store and/or write information in the memory. Memory 113 may be integrated into processor 112 . Memory 123 may be integrated into processor 122. The processor (eg, processor 112 and/or processor 122) and the memory (eg, memory 113 and/or memory 123) may be provided in an integrated circuit (eg, the integrated circuit may be provided in a UE or a base station or other network node) .
上述内容简要阐述了本申请实施例的网络架构，为更好地理解本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将简要介绍与本申请相关的几个内容。The above content briefly explains the network architecture of the embodiment of the present application. In order to better understand the technical solutions of the embodiment of the present application, several contents related to the present application will be briefly introduced below.
一、解调参考信号(dedicated demodulation reference signal，DMRS)1. Dedicated demodulation reference signal (DMRS)
解调参考信号(DMRS)是用于接收端进行等效信道估计的参考信号。DMRS可以用于估计数据信道(如物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH))，或控制信道(如物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)或物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH))经历的等效信道矩阵，从而用于数据的检测和解调。以PUSCH为例，DMRS通常与发送的数据信号进行相同的预编码处理，即采用相同的预编码矩阵P，来保证DMRS与数据信号经历相同的等效信道。Demodulation reference signal (DMRS) is a reference signal used by the receiving end for equivalent channel estimation. DMRS can be used to estimate data channels (such as physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)), or control channels (such as physical uplink control channel) , PUCCH) or physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)), which is used for data detection and demodulation. Taking PUSCH as an example, DMRS usually undergoes the same precoding process as the transmitted data signal, that is, the same precoding matrix P is used to ensure that DMRS and data signals experience the same equivalent channel.
举例来说，假设发送端发送的DMRS向量为s，发送的数据符号向量为x，DMRS与数据符号进行相同的预编码操作，即乘以相同的预编码矩阵P，接收端相应的接收信号向量可以表示如下。For example, assume that the DMRS vector sent by the transmitter is s and the data symbol vector sent is x. The DMRS and data symbols perform the same precoding operation, that is, multiplied by the same precoding matrix P. The corresponding received signal vector at the receiving end It can be expressed as follows.
数据： data:
DMRS： DMRS:
其中，上述公式(1-1)是数据符号传输至接收端的等效接收信号向量(y)，上述公式(1-2)是DMRS传输至接收端的等效接收信号向量(r)。向量n表示噪声。Among them, the above formula (1-1) is the equivalent received signal vector (y) of the data symbol transmitted to the receiving end, and the above formula (1-2) is the equivalent received signal vector (r) of DMRS transmitted to the receiving end. Vector n represents noise.
由上述公式(1-1)和上述公式(1-2)可知，对于数据信号和DMRS，经历的等效信道均为接收端可以基于已知的DMRS向量s，利用信道估计算法(如最小二乘(least squares，LS)信道估计，或最小均方误差(minimum mean square error，MMSE)信道估计等)获得对等效信道(即HP)的估计。基于等效信道可以完成数据信号的多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)均衡和后续解调。It can be seen from the above formula (1-1) and the above formula (1-2) that for data signals and DMRS, the equivalent channels experienced are both The receiving end can use the channel estimation algorithm (such as least squares (LS) channel estimation, or minimum mean square error (MMSE) channel estimation, etc.) based on the known DMRS vector s to obtain the equivalent channel (i.e. HP) estimate. Multiple input multiple output (MIMO) equalization and subsequent demodulation of the data signal can be completed based on the equivalent channel.
DMRS用于估计等效信道(即HP)，其维度为NR×R(即NR行R列)。其中，NR为接收天线数目，R为传输流数(也称为传输层数、空间层数或rank)。通常来说，一个DMRS端口(DMRS port)与一个空间层相对应。对于传输层数为R的MIMO传输，需要的DMRS端口数目为R。为了保证信道估计的质量，通常不同的DMRS端口为正交端口。不同DMRS端口对应的DMRS符号在频域、时频或码域的至少一个域上正交。DMRS is used to estimate equivalent channels (i.e. HP), its dimension is N R ×R (i.e. N R rows and R columns). Among them, NR is the number of receiving antennas, and R is the number of transmission streams (also called the number of transmission layers, the number of spatial layers, or rank). Generally speaking, a DMRS port corresponds to a spatial layer. For MIMO transmission with R transmission layer number, the required number of DMRS ports is R. In order to ensure the quality of channel estimation, usually different DMRS ports are orthogonal ports. DMRS symbols corresponding to different DMRS ports are orthogonal in at least one domain of frequency domain, time frequency or code domain.
在本申请的一些场景中，“传输层数”和“rank”表示相同的含义，可以相互替换使用。In some scenarios of this application, "transmission layer number" and "rank" have the same meaning and can be used interchangeably.
二、发送预编码矩阵指示(transmitted precoding matrix indicator，TPMI)2. Transmitted precoding matrix indicator (TPMI)
在多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)***中，为了有效保证上行数据的传输性能，通常会对上行多层发送信号进行预编码处理。举例来说，假设终端设备发送的数据符号向量为x＝[x1,x2,…,xl,...,xL]T，其中xl表示第l个空间层对应的发送数据符号。假设预编码矩阵为W，预编码后的发送信号向量可以表示为：
In a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) system, in order to effectively ensure the transmission performance of uplink data, uplink multi-layer transmission signals are usually precoded. For example , assume that the data symbol vector sent by the terminal device is . Assuming that the precoding matrix is W, the precoded transmitted signal vector can be expressed as:
其中，表示第j个发送天线端口对应的发送符号，j的取值为1,2,3,...,N。in, Indicates the transmission symbol corresponding to the j-th transmission antenna port, and the value of j is 1,2,3,...,N.
在实际应用中，上行传输中终端设备采用的预编码矩阵(W)通常是网络设备指示给终端设备的。其中，考虑到预编码矩阵的指示开销和性能，对于基于码本(codebook based)***，预编码矩阵W通常是从预设的预编码矩阵集合(也称为码本codebook)中选取的。以NR协议为例，对于单天线单层传输***，预编码矩阵W＝1。对于多天线***，网络设备给终端设备发送TPMI(发送预编码矩阵指示)，用于指示需要使用的上行预编码矩阵是码本集合中的哪个预编码矩阵。以4天线端口(antenna port)为例，NR协议针对rank＝1到4定义了不同的码本，分别如下述表1到表4所示。可理解，表1到表4中符号“-”表示无内容。In practical applications, the precoding matrix (W) used by the terminal device in uplink transmission is usually indicated by the network device to the terminal device. Among them, considering the indication overhead and performance of the precoding matrix, for a codebook based system, the precoding matrix W is usually selected from a preset precoding matrix set (also called a codebook codebook). Taking the NR protocol as an example, for a single-antenna single-layer transmission system, the precoding matrix W=1. For a multi-antenna system, the network device sends a TPMI (Transmit Precoding Matrix Indication) to the terminal device to indicate which precoding matrix in the codebook set is the uplink precoding matrix that needs to be used. Taking the 4-antenna port as an example, the NR protocol defines different codebooks for rank=1 to 4, as shown in Tables 1 to 4 below. It can be understood that the symbol "-" in Tables 1 to 4 means no content.
表1：4天线端口，单层(即rank＝1)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合
Table 1: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 4 antenna ports and single layer (i.e. rank=1) transmission
表2：4天线端口，2层(即rank＝2)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合

Table 2: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 4-antenna port, 2-layer (i.e. rank=2) transmission

表3：4天线端口，3层(即rank＝3)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合
Table 3: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 4-antenna port, 3-layer (i.e. rank=3) transmission
表4：4天线端口，4层(即rank＝4)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合
Table 4: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 4-antenna port, 4-layer (i.e. rank=4) transmission
受限于终端设备的体积和成本，不同终端设备的天线架构和能力具有差异。对于不同终端设备的发送天线能力，可使用的预编码矩阵不相同。换句话说，对于不同的天线能力，TPMI索引的取值范围不同。示例性的，1)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均不支持相干传输(Non Coherent)，则该终端设备可使用表1中TPMI index＝0～3、表2中TPMI index＝0～5、表3中TPMI index＝0、以及表4中TPMI index＝0所标识的预编码矩阵。2)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线支持部分相干传输(Partial Coherent)，例如仅存在天线子集或天线子组中的天线可以支持相干传输，则对应表1中TPMI index＝4～11、表2中TPMI index＝6～13、表3中TPMI index＝1～2、以及表4中TPMI index＝1～2所标识的预编码矩阵。3)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均支持相干传输(Full Coherent)，则对应表1中TPMI index＝12～27、表2中TPMI index＝14～21、表3中TPMI index＝3～6、以及表4中TPMI index＝3～4所标识的 预编码矩阵。可理解，当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均支持相干传输(Full Coherent)时，由于终端设备的天线能力较强，所以终端设备可使用表1到表4中的任意预编码矩阵(包含非相干传输的预编码矩阵、部分相干传输的预编码矩阵以及全相干传输的预编码矩阵)，不局限于表1中TPMI index＝12～27、表2中TPMI index＝14～21、表3中TPMI index＝3～6、以及表4中TPMI index＝3～4所标识的预编码矩阵。当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为支持部分相干传输(Partial Coherent)时，终端设备可使用表1到表4中非相干传输的预编码矩阵以及部分相干传输的预编码矩阵，对应表1中TPMI index＝4～27、表2中TPMI index＝6～21、表3中TPMI index＝1～6、以及表4中TPMI index＝1～4所标识的预编码矩阵。当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为支持非相干传输(Non Coherent)时，终端设备仅可使用表1到表4中非相干传输的预编码矩阵，对应表1中TPMI index＝0～3、表2中TPMI index＝0～5、表3中TPMI index＝0、以及表4中TPMI index＝0所标识的预编码矩阵。Limited by the size and cost of terminal equipment, the antenna architecture and capabilities of different terminal equipment vary. For the transmit antenna capabilities of different terminal devices, the precoding matrices that can be used are different. In other words, for different antenna capabilities, the value range of the TPMI index is different. For example, 1) When the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas do not support coherent transmission (Non Coherent), the terminal device can use TPMI index=0~3 in Table 1 and TPMI in Table 2 The precoding matrix identified by index=0~5, TPMI index=0 in Table 3, and TPMI index=0 in Table 4. 2) When the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas support partial coherent transmission (Partial Coherent), for example, only an antenna subset or an antenna in an antenna subgroup can support coherent transmission, then the corresponding TPMI index in Table 1 =4~11, TPMI index=6~13 in Table 2, TPMI index=1~2 in Table 3, and precoding matrices identified by TPMI index=1~2 in Table 4. 3) When the antenna capability of the terminal equipment (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas support coherent transmission (Full Coherent), it corresponds to TPMI index = 12 ~ 27 in Table 1, TPMI index = 14 ~ 21 in Table 2, and TPMI index = 14 ~ 21 in Table 3. TPMI index=3~6, and those identified by TPMI index=3~4 in Table 4 precoding matrix. It can be understood that when the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas support coherent transmission (Full Coherent), the terminal device can use any preset in Table 1 to Table 4 because the antenna capability of the terminal device is strong. Coding matrices (including precoding matrices for non-coherent transmission, precoding matrices for partially coherent transmission, and precoding matrices for fully coherent transmission) are not limited to TPMI index=12~27 in Table 1 and TPMI index=14~ in Table 2 21. The precoding matrices identified by TPMI index=3~6 in Table 3 and TPMI index=3~4 in Table 4. When the antenna capability of the terminal equipment (or UE) is to support partial coherent transmission (Partial Coherent), the terminal equipment can use the precoding matrix for non-coherent transmission and the precoding matrix for partial coherent transmission in Table 1 to Table 4, corresponding to Table 1 The precoding matrices identified by TPMI index=4~27, TPMI index=6~21 in Table 2, TPMI index=1~6 in Table 3, and TPMI index=1~4 in Table 4. When the antenna capability of the terminal equipment (or UE) is to support non-coherent transmission (Non Coherent), the terminal equipment can only use the precoding matrix for non-coherent transmission in Table 1 to Table 4, corresponding to TPMI index=0~3 in Table 1 , the precoding matrix identified by TPMI index=0~5 in Table 2, TPMI index=0 in Table 3, and TPMI index=0 in Table 4.
三、基于码本(codebook)的上行传输3. Uplink transmission based on codebook
对于上行传输，当终端设备配置有多天线发射射频通道时，终端设备可以通过多天线进行上行MIMO传输。或者多个终端设备在相同的时频资源上同时进行传输，构成一个虚拟的MIMO***，即上行(uplink，UL)多用户(multi-user，MU)MIMO传输(UL MU-MIMO)。目前NR协议支持基于码本(codebook)的传输和非码本(non-codebook)传输两种上行MIMO传输模式。For uplink transmission, when the terminal device is configured with multiple antennas to transmit radio frequency channels, the terminal device can perform uplink MIMO transmission through multiple antennas. Or multiple terminal devices transmit simultaneously on the same time-frequency resources to form a virtual MIMO system, that is, uplink (UL) multi-user (MU) MIMO transmission (UL MU-MIMO). Currently, the NR protocol supports two uplink MIMO transmission modes: codebook-based transmission and non-codebook transmission.
对于基于码本(codebook based)的上行传输，可以根据固定或预设的码本确定上行传输的预编码矩阵。具体的，基于码本的上行传输流程包括：1)终端设备向网络设备发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)。2)网络设备根据终端设备发送的SRS进行上行信道测量，并确定上行传输的DMRS端口索引、传输层数(即rank)、预编码矩阵以及调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)等信息。3)网络设备将PUSCH的资源调度信息如MCS、TPMI索引、传输层数(即rank)、以及DMRS端口索引等通知给终端设备。4)终端设备基于网络设备指示的MCS对上行数据进行编码调制，并基于指示的TPMI索引和传输层数确定预编码矩阵，对上行数据和DMRS端口索引所指示的DMRS信号分别进行预编码，进而对上行数据和DMRS进行发送。For codebook-based uplink transmission, the precoding matrix for uplink transmission can be determined based on a fixed or preset codebook. Specifically, the codebook-based uplink transmission process includes: 1) The terminal device sends a sounding reference signal (SRS) to the network device. 2) The network equipment performs uplink channel measurements based on the SRS sent by the terminal equipment, and determines the DMRS port index, transmission layer number (i.e. rank), precoding matrix, modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and other information for uplink transmission. . 3) The network device notifies the terminal device of PUSCH resource scheduling information such as MCS, TPMI index, transmission layer number (i.e. rank), and DMRS port index. 4) The terminal equipment codes and modulates the uplink data based on the MCS indicated by the network equipment, determines the precoding matrix based on the indicated TPMI index and the number of transmission layers, and precodes the uplink data and the DMRS signal indicated by the DMRS port index respectively, and then Send uplink data and DMRS.
也就是说，在上行传输过程中，终端设备的发送行为受到网络设备的调度。网络设备可以通过指示信息，通知终端设备发送上行数据的传输层数(也称为rank)、TPMI索引、以及对应的DMRS端口索引。终端设备可以在上行数据的发送时刻，在对应的时频资源上采用TPMI索引标识的预编码矩阵以及DMRS端口索引所指示的DMRS和传输层数(即rank)，对上行数据和DMRS进行发送。其中，DMRS端口(DMRS port)索引以及传输层数(即rank)的含义参见现有标准或协议，这里不一一详述。That is to say, during the uplink transmission process, the sending behavior of the terminal device is scheduled by the network device. The network device can notify the terminal device of the transmission layer number (also called rank), TPMI index, and corresponding DMRS port index for sending uplink data through indication information. The terminal device can use the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index and the DMRS and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) indicated by the DMRS port index on the corresponding time-frequency resource to send the uplink data and DMRS at the time of sending the uplink data. Among them, the meaning of the DMRS port index and the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) can be found in existing standards or protocols, and will not be detailed here.
以NR协议为例，目前上行(uplink，UL)最大支持4层传输，网络设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)信令向终端设备指示传输层数(即rank)和对应的TPMI索引，以及DMRS端口索引。具体的，DCI信令中包括预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)字段，用于指示传输层数(即rank)和对应的TPMI索引。对于终端设备(或UE)的不同天线能力和配置参数，协议定义了不同的传输层数目(即rank值)和TPMI索引的可选组合。例如，对于4天线端口，如果终端设备的配置参数为变换预编码器(transform precoder)未开启(循环前缀(cyclic prefix，CP)正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing，OFDM)波形)，且上行全功率传输(ul-FullPowerTransmission)没有被配置或者配置为全功率模式2(fullpowerMode2)或全功率(fullpower)时，rank和TPMI索引的可选组合如下述表5所示。Taking the NR protocol as an example, currently the uplink (UL) supports up to 4 layers of transmission. The network device can indicate the number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) and the corresponding TPMI to the terminal device through downlink control information (DCI) signaling. index, and DMRS port index. Specifically, DCI signaling includes precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields, which are used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the corresponding TPMI index. For different antenna capabilities and configuration parameters of the terminal equipment (or UE), the protocol defines different optional combinations of the number of transmission layers (ie, rank value) and TPMI index. For example, for a 4-antenna port, if the configuration parameter of the terminal device is that the transform precoder is not turned on (cyclic prefix (CP) orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) waveform) , and when uplink full power transmission (ul-FullPowerTransmission) is not configured or is configured as full power mode 2 (fullpowerMode2) or full power (full power), the optional combinations of rank and TPMI index are as shown in Table 5 below.
可理解，表5的TPMI索引值表示前述表1至前述表4中对应的预编码矩阵。It can be understood that the TPMI index value in Table 5 represents the corresponding precoding matrix in the aforementioned Table 1 to the aforementioned Table 4.
表5：4天线端口，TPMI索引和传输层数(即rank)的可选组合(transform precoder未开启,ul-FullPowerTransmission没有被配置，或者配置为fullpowerMode2或fullpower)

Table 5: Optional combinations of 4 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)

上述表5的第一列、第三列、以及第五列均表示预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)字段的值，该预编码信息和层数的值为索引值，一个索引值表示rank和TPMI索引的一个组合。上述表5的第二列、第四列以及第六列分别表示不同天线能力下rank和TPMI索引的可选组合。终端设备根据DCI信令中预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)字段的值和自己对应的天线能力(如相干、部分相干、或非相干)，可以获知上行传输的传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引。举例来说，假设DCI信令中预编码信息和层数字段的值为3(即索引值为3)，终端设备的天线能力为非相干(non Coherent)，则可以确定上行传输的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合为：rank＝1，TPMI＝3。The first column, the third column, and the fifth column of the above Table 5 all represent the values of the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields. The values of the precoding information and number of layers are index values, one The index value represents a combination of rank and TPMI index. The second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 5 above respectively represent the optional combinations of rank and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities. The terminal device can learn the number of transmission layers for uplink transmission based on the value of the precoding information and number of layers fields in DCI signaling and its corresponding antenna capabilities (such as coherent, partially coherent, or non-coherent) (i.e. rank) and TPMI index. For example, assuming that the value of the precoding information and layer number fields in DCI signaling is 3 (that is, the index value is 3), and the antenna capability of the terminal device is non-coherent (non Coherent), the number of transmission layers for uplink transmission can be determined The combination with TPMI index is: rank=1, TPMI=3.
此外，DCI信令中还包含天线端口(antenna port)字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。对于不同的rank值，协议定义了不同的DMRS端口索引表格。以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，当transform precoder未开启时，1层(即rank＝1)到4层(即rank＝4)对应的DMRS端口索引表格如下述表6到表9所示。终端设备可以基于预编码信息和层数字段和自己的天线能力获知的rank值，选择对应的DMRS端口索引表，从而确定天线端口字段指示的DMRS端口索引。In addition, DCI signaling also contains an antenna port field, which is used to indicate the DMRS port index. For different rank values, the protocol defines different DMRS port index tables. Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, when the transform precoder is not turned on, the corresponding DMRS port index tables from layer 1 (i.e. rank=1) to layer 4 (i.e. rank=4) are as shown in Table 6 to Table 9 below. The terminal device can select the corresponding DMRS port index table based on the rank value obtained from the precoding information and layer number fields and its own antenna capabilities, thereby determining the DMRS port index indicated by the antenna port field.
表6：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1

Table 6: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1

表7：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2
Table 7: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2
表8：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3
Table 8: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3
表9：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4
Table 9: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4
上述表6到表9中第一列(value)表示天线端口(antenna port)字段的值，第三列(DMRS port(s))表示DMRS端口索引值。上述表6到表9中第二列和第四列参数的含义可参考现有标准或协议，这里不一一详述。The first column (value) in the above Tables 6 to 9 represents the value of the antenna port field, and the third column (DMRS port(s)) represents the DMRS port index value. The meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in the above Tables 6 to 9 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here.
由NR协议中rank、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引的指示方法(如上述表5到表9所示)可知，最大只能支持4层(即rank＝4)的上行传输。但随着终端设备能力的进一步提升，大于4个发送天线的终端设备日益增多。而大于4天线的终端设备最大可支持的传输层数(即rank)也大于4，比如8天线的终端设备最大可支持8层(即rank＝8)的上行传输。因此，大于4天线端口的TPMI索引和DMRS端口索引的指示亟待探索。From the indication methods of rank, TPMI index and DMRS port index in the NR protocol (as shown in Table 5 to Table 9 above), it can be seen that uplink transmission of a maximum of 4 layers (ie, rank=4) can be supported. However, with the further improvement of terminal equipment capabilities, the number of terminal equipment with more than 4 transmitting antennas is increasing day by day. The maximum number of transmission layers (rank) that a terminal device with more than 4 antennas can support is also greater than 4. For example, a terminal device with 8 antennas can support a maximum of 8 layers (rank=8) of uplink transmission. Therefore, the indication of TPMI index and DMRS port index larger than 4 antenna ports needs to be explored urgently.
四、非码本(non-codebook)传输 4. Non-codebook transmission
对于非码本传输，相比于基于码本的传输，其主要区别在于：非码本传输的预编码矩阵不再是从预设的码本中选取，从而可以节省预编码矩阵的指示开销，相比codebook传输方式，预编码矩阵无需从有限的预设预编码集合中选择，突破了码本中预编码矩阵对幅度和相位量化精度的限制，可以有效提升预编码矩阵精度，进一步提升传输性能。For non-codebook transmission, compared with codebook-based transmission, the main difference is that the precoding matrix for non-codebook transmission is no longer selected from the preset codebook, thus saving the indication overhead of the precoding matrix. Compared with the codebook transmission method, the precoding matrix does not need to be selected from a limited preset precoding set, breaking through the limitations of the precoding matrix in the codebook on the amplitude and phase quantization accuracy, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding matrix and further improve the transmission performance. .
参见图3，图3是本申请实施例提供的非码本的上行传输流程示意图。如图3所示，非码本的上行传输流程包括：1)终端设备通过下行参考信号进行信道测量，获得候选的上行预编码矩阵，并基于确定出的上行预编码矩阵对SRS进行预编码后发送给网络设备。2)网络设备基于终端设备发送的SRS进行信道估计，并基于信道测量结果对终端设备进行调度，确定上行传输的SRS资源和上行传输的MCS，并通知给终端设备。其中上行传输的SRS资源通过SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator，SRI)通知给终端设备。3)终端设备根据接收到的SRI确定传输层数(即rank)，通过MCS信息对数据进行编码调制，进而对预编码后的上行数据进行发送。Refer to Figure 3, which is a schematic diagram of a non-codebook uplink transmission process provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the non-codebook uplink transmission process includes: 1) The terminal equipment performs channel measurement through the downlink reference signal, obtains the candidate uplink precoding matrix, and precodes the SRS based on the determined uplink precoding matrix. Sent to network device. 2) The network device performs channel estimation based on the SRS sent by the terminal device, schedules the terminal device based on the channel measurement results, determines the SRS resources for uplink transmission and the MCS for uplink transmission, and notifies the terminal device. The SRS resources for uplink transmission are notified to the terminal device through the SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI). 3) The terminal device determines the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) based on the received SRI, codes and modulates the data through MCS information, and then sends the precoded uplink data.
五、探测参考信号资源指示(SRS resource indicator，SRI)5. Sounding Reference Signal Resource Indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI)
探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)主要用于网络设备确定上行信道质量，从而进行上行频率选择性调度。网络设备可以通过高层信令比如无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令或者介质接入控制(medium access control-control element，MAC-CE)信令配置SRS资源所占的时频资源位置以及在该SRS资源上发送SRS采用的发送方式。每个SRS资源的配置信息(例如，高层参数SRS-Resource)中至少包含：该SRS资源的索引号，SRS资源所占的时频位置信息，SRS发送端口号等。SRS资源配置的时域类型有周期的、半静态的和非周期的。The sounding reference signal (SRS) is mainly used by network equipment to determine the quality of the uplink channel, thereby performing uplink frequency selective scheduling. Network equipment can configure the time-frequency resource location occupied by SRS resources and the location of SRS resources through high-level signaling such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling or medium access control-control element (MAC-CE) signaling. The sending method used to send SRS on this SRS resource. The configuration information of each SRS resource (for example, the high-level parameter SRS-Resource) includes at least: the index number of the SRS resource, the time-frequency location information occupied by the SRS resource, the SRS transmission port number, etc. The time domain types of SRS resource configuration include periodic, semi-static and aperiodic.
对非码本的上行传输而言，网络设备可以通过RRC信令指示SRS资源配置信息和与该SRS关联的信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)参考信号(CSI reference signal，CSI-RS)资源配置信息，其中，CSI-RS资源配置信息中包括该CSI-RS资源的端口、所占的时频资源等。网络设备在相应的时频资源上发送CSI-RS，终端设备在相应的时频资源上接收CSI-RS并基于信道互易性假设结合自身算法获得候选的预编码矩阵，进而在相应的SRS资源上发送经过所述候选预编码矩阵处理的SRS，网络设备在相应的SRS时频资源上接收并测量经过加权的SRS获得上行信道信息。网络设备通过自身的实现算法确定调度该终端设备发送PUSCH所使用的时频资源以及传输方案，并通过用于上行调度的PDCCH中承载的DCI信令将这些信息指示给终端设备。所述传输方案至少包括终端设备发送PUSCH所使用的波束信息、SRS资源指示(SRI)、调制与编码策略(MCS)、天线端口指示信息。终端设备在接收到该调度PUSCH传输的DCI之后，会按照DCI中指示的时频资源以及传输方案进行PUSCH传输。其中，每个SRS资源上发送的SRS都对应一个预编码矩阵，通常，一个SRS资源为一个虚拟端口，高层信令配置的SRS资源个数表征了PUSCH传输所能支持的最大层数。终端设备在发送PUSCH的同时需要发送与PUSCH相关联的DMRS，网络设备通过DMRS进行信道估计并解调对应的PUSCH。DMRS端口与SRI指示的SRS资源一一对应。其中，SRI的作用是指示终端设备发送PUSCH使用的发送天线间的相位加权按照发送SRI指示的SRS的发送天线间进行相同的相位加权操作，并同时指示了PUSCH的传输层数。For non-codebook uplink transmission, the network device can indicate the SRS resource configuration information and the channel state information (CSI) reference signal (CSI reference signal, CSI-RS) resources associated with the SRS through RRC signaling. Configuration information, wherein the CSI-RS resource configuration information includes the port of the CSI-RS resource, the time-frequency resources occupied, etc. The network device sends CSI-RS on the corresponding time-frequency resources, and the terminal device receives the CSI-RS on the corresponding time-frequency resources and obtains the candidate precoding matrix based on the channel reciprocity assumption and its own algorithm, and then uses the corresponding SRS resources to The SRS processed by the candidate precoding matrix is transmitted upstream, and the network device receives and measures the weighted SRS on the corresponding SRS time-frequency resource to obtain uplink channel information. The network device determines the time-frequency resources and transmission scheme used by the terminal device to send PUSCH through its own implementation algorithm, and indicates this information to the terminal device through the DCI signaling carried in the PDCCH used for uplink scheduling. The transmission scheme at least includes beam information, SRS resource indication (SRI), modulation and coding strategy (MCS), and antenna port indication information used by the terminal equipment to transmit PUSCH. After receiving the DCI that schedules PUSCH transmission, the terminal device will perform PUSCH transmission according to the time-frequency resources and transmission scheme indicated in the DCI. Among them, the SRS sent on each SRS resource corresponds to a precoding matrix. Usually, one SRS resource is a virtual port, and the number of SRS resources configured in high-level signaling represents the maximum number of layers that PUSCH transmission can support. When sending PUSCH, the terminal device needs to send DMRS associated with PUSCH. The network device uses DMRS to perform channel estimation and demodulate the corresponding PUSCH. The DMRS port has a one-to-one correspondence with the SRS resource indicated by the SRI. Among them, the function of SRI is to instruct the terminal equipment to perform the same phase weighting operation between the transmitting antennas used to transmit the PUSCH according to the same phase weighting operation between the transmitting antennas that transmit the SRS indicated by the SRI, and also indicates the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH.
下述表10所示为DCI信令中SRI字段的取值与SRS资源索引的映射关系。表10中第一列、第三列以及第五列均表示SRI字段的取值，第二列、第四列以及第六列分别表示相应取值指示的SRS资源索引。其中，NSRS表示网络设备通过高层信令配置的SRS资源个数，SRI字段的比特数取决于配置的SRS资源个数。当SRS资源个数大于1时，SRI字段的比特数大于0。以NSRS＝4为例，4比特的SRI字段的每一个值都用于指示一个或者多个SRS资源，SRS资源个数表征了传输层数。比如，4个单端口SRS资源(索引值从0到3)对应承载的预编码矩阵分别为：[1 0 0 0]，[0 1 0 0]，[0 0 1 0]，[0 0 0 1]。当SRI字段指示索引值为7时，此时SRS资源编号1和2被指示，则PUSCH传输采用2层，且每层的预编码矩阵分别为[0 1 0 0]和[0 0 1 0]。Table 10 below shows the mapping relationship between the value of the SRI field in DCI signaling and the SRS resource index. The first, third and fifth columns in Table 10 all represent the value of the SRI field, and the second, fourth and sixth columns respectively represent the SRS resource index indicated by the corresponding value. Among them, N SRS indicates the number of SRS resources configured by the network device through high-level signaling. The number of bits in the SRI field depends on the number of configured SRS resources. When the number of SRS resources is greater than 1, the number of bits in the SRI field is greater than 0. Taking N SRS =4 as an example, each value of the 4-bit SRI field is used to indicate one or more SRS resources, and the number of SRS resources represents the number of transmission layers. For example, the precoding matrices corresponding to four single-port SRS resources (index values from 0 to 3) are: [1 0 0 0], [0 1 0 0], [0 0 1 0], [0 0 0 1]. When the SRI field indicates an index value of 7, and SRS resource numbers 1 and 2 are indicated, PUSCH transmission uses 2 layers, and the precoding matrices of each layer are [0 1 0 0] and [0 0 1 0] respectively. .
表10：SRI字段示例1

Table 10: SRI field example 1

由上述SRS资源的指示(如上述表10所示)可知，目前上行也只能支持最大4层(即rank＝4)的非码本传输。但随着终端设备能力的进一步提升，大于4个发送天线的终端设备日益增多。而大于4天线的终端设备最大可支持的传输层数(即rank)也大于4，比如8天线的终端设备最大可支持8层(即rank＝8)的上行传输。因此，大于4天线端口下非码本传输的SRS资源的指示也亟待探索。It can be seen from the above indication of SRS resources (as shown in the above Table 10) that currently the uplink can only support non-codebook transmission of a maximum of 4 layers (ie, rank=4). However, with the further improvement of terminal equipment capabilities, the number of terminal equipment with more than 4 transmitting antennas is increasing day by day. The maximum number of transmission layers (rank) that a terminal device with more than 4 antennas can support is also greater than 4. For example, a terminal device with 8 antennas can support a maximum of 8 layers (rank=8) of uplink transmission. Therefore, the indication of SRS resources for non-codebook transmission under more than 4 antenna ports also needs to be explored urgently.
对于基于码本(codebook)的上行传输，本申请实施例提供一种信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质，可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示以及DMRS端口索引指示，并可以在不影响兼容性的情况下，降低指示开销。或者说，本申请实施例可以最大程度的复用4天线端口的传输层数(有1层到4层)和TPMI索引的可选组合表格(上述表5)以及DMRS端口索引指示表格(上述表6到表9)，在不影响4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示以及DMRS端口索引指示的情况下，降低大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示开销以及降低大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示开销，减少冗余。For codebook-based uplink transmission, embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support a combined indication of the number of transmission layers and TPMI index greater than 4 antenna ports, as well as a DMRS port index indication. , and can reduce the instruction overhead without affecting compatibility. In other words, the embodiment of the present application can reuse the transmission layer number of the 4-antenna port (there are 1 to 4 layers) and the optional combination table of the TPMI index (the above table 5) and the DMRS port index indication table (the above table) to the greatest extent. 6 to Table 9), without affecting the combined indication of the number of transmission layers and TPMI index of the 4-antenna port and the DMRS port index indication, the overhead of the combined indication of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports is reduced and the overhead is reduced by more than 4-antenna port DMRS port index indicates overhead to reduce redundancy.
对于非码本(non-codebook)传输，本申请实施例提供一种信息指示方法、装置及可读存储介质，可以支持大于4个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示，从而支持大于4层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能。For non-codebook (non-codebook) transmission, embodiments of the present application provide an information indication method, device and readable storage medium, which can support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting more than 4 layers of non-codebook transmission. transmission, thereby improving transmission performance.
下面将结合更多的附图对本申请提供的技术方案进行详细说明。The technical solutions provided by this application will be described in detail below with reference to more drawings.
为便于清楚描述本申请的技术方案，本申请通过多个实施例进行阐述，具体参见下文。本申请中，除特殊说明外，各个实施例或实现方式之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、实施方式、实施方法、或实现方法。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In order to clearly describe the technical solution of the present application, the present application is elaborated through multiple embodiments, for details, please refer to the following. In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between various embodiments or implementations may be referred to each other. In the various embodiments of this application and the various implementation methods/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment, if there are no special instructions or logical conflicts, the differences between different embodiments and the various implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment will be different. The terminology and/or descriptions between implementation methods/implementation methods are consistent and can be referenced to each other. Different embodiments, as well as the technical features in each implementation method/implementation method/implementation method in each embodiment are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments, implementations, implementation methods, or implementation methods. The embodiments of the present application described below do not constitute a limitation on the protection scope of the present application.
实施例一Embodiment 1
本申请实施例一主要介绍基于低rank(如rank＝1～4)和高rank(如rank＝5～8)的对应关系，将rank＝1～8及其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合编码在一张表格中，并按照该对应关系，将存在对应关系的两个rank的DMRS端口索引也编码在一张表格中，通过这两张表格联合确定需要采用的rank，TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引。The first embodiment of the present application mainly introduces the corresponding relationship between low rank (such as rank=1~4) and high rank (such as rank=5~8). The combination of rank=1~8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes is encoded in In a table, and according to the corresponding relationship, the DMRS port indexes of the two ranks with corresponding relationships are also encoded in a table, and the rank, TPMI index and DMRS port index to be used are jointly determined through these two tables.
参见图4，图4是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第一种流程示意图。该方法中所涉及的终端设备可具备大于4个发送天线，比如本申请中的终端设备具备6个发送天线或8个发送天线。如图4所示，该信息指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：Referring to Figure 4, Figure 4 is a first schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas. For example, the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas. As shown in Figure 4, the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S101，网络设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，第一指示信息至少有第一值，第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第一组合，当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第二组合。S101. The network device sends first indication information and second indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index. The transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information has at least a first value. , the first value indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index, the multiple combinations include the first combination and the second combination; the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to multiple sets One of the multiple sets includes at least a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, value, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination.
相应的，终端设备接收该第一指示信息和该第二指示信息。 Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information and the second indication information.
S102，终端设备根据该第二指示信息的值，从该多个组合中确定一个组合。S102: The terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
可选的，上述第一指示信息和上述第二指示信息可以携带于一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第一指示信息和该第二指示信息可以携带于下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)信令中。举例来说，该第一指示信息可以是DCI信令中的预编码信息和层数(precoding information and number of layers)字段，用于指示传输层数(即rank)和该传输层数对应的TPMI索引的组合；该第二指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口(antenna port)字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。Optionally, the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. For example, the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling. For example, the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers (precoding information and number of layers) fields in DCI signaling, used to indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI corresponding to the number of transmission layers. A combination of indexes; the second indication information may be the antenna port (antenna port) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index.
可选的，上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)至少有一个值(为便于描述记为第一值)，这个值(即第一值)指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合。该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，比如该传输层数和该TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵的层数相同。其中一个传输层数和这个传输层数对应的TPMI索引为一个组合。示例性的，这多个组合至少包括第一组合和第二组合。第一组合中的传输层数为1,2,3,4中的一个，第二组合中的传输层数为5,6,7,8中的一个。换句话说，第一组合中的传输层数和第二组合中的传输层数存在对应关系。举例来说，以8天线端口为例，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为5；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为8。或者，当第一组合中的传输层数为1时，第二组合中的传输层数为8；当第一组合中的传输层数为2时，第二组合中的传输层数为7；当第一组合中的传输层数为3时，第二组合中的传输层数为6；当第一组合中的传输层数为4时，第二组合中的传输层数为5。当然，第一组合中的传输层数和第二组合中的传输层数还可以有其他对应关系，不局限于上述举例，本申请实施例不限制传输层数之间的对应关系。Optionally, the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value (denoted as the first value for ease of description), and this value (i.e., the first value) indicates the transmission layer number and TPMI index. Multiple combinations. The number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index. For example, the number of transmission layers is the same as the number of layers of the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index. One of the transport layer numbers and the TPMI index corresponding to this transport layer number are a combination. For example, the multiple combinations include at least a first combination and a second combination. The number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8. In other words, there is a corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination. For example, taking 8 antenna ports as an example, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 2. The number of transmission layers in the combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination The number of transport layers is 8. Or, when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7; When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6; when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5. Of course, the number of transmission layers in the first combination and the number of transmission layers in the second combination may also have other corresponding relationships, which are not limited to the above examples. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the corresponding relationship between the number of transmission layers.
可选的，上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)的值属于多个集合中的一个，每个集合包括至少一个值，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合。当第二指示信息的值为第一集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第一组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第一组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。当第二指示信息的值为第二集合中的值时，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引关联第二组合，例如，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与第二组合中的传输层数(即rank)相同。换句话说，当天线端口字段取不同集合中的值时，该天线端口字段指示的DMRS端口索引对应不同的传输层数。Optionally, the value of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field) belongs to one of multiple sets, each set includes at least one value, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the first combination. The number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) in is the same. When the value of the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination. For example, the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is associated with the second combination. The number of transmission layers (i.e. rank) in is the same. In other words, when the antenna port field takes values in different sets, the DMRS port index indicated by the antenna port field corresponds to different transmission layer numbers.
可理解，为了支持大于4层的上行传输，需要对rank，TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引的指示进行设计。下面举例说明本申请实施例中第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)如何指示传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引的组合，以及第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)如何指示DMRS端口索引。It is understandable that in order to support uplink transmission greater than 4 layers, the indications of rank, TPMI index and DMRS port index need to be designed. The following is an example of how the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) indicates the combination of transmission layer number (i.e. rank) and TPMI index, and how the second indication information (such as antenna port field) indicates in the embodiment of the present application DMRS port index.
一个示例中，以8天线端口(最大8层的上行传输)为例，将rank＝5～8与rank＝1～4建立一一对应的关系。以rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应，rank＝3与rank＝7对应，rank＝4与rank＝8对应为例。In an example, taking 8 antenna ports (maximum 8-layer uplink transmission) as an example, a one-to-one correspondence is established between rank=5~8 and rank=1~4. For example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, rank=2 corresponds to rank=6, rank=3 corresponds to rank=7, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=8.
(1)根据上述对应关系，本申请实施例将rank＝1～4和其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合、与rank＝5～8和其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合编码在一张表格中。如下述表11所示，表11示出了8天线端口的TPMI索引和传输层数的可选组合，也就是说表11示出了1层到8层与其分别对应的TPMI索引的可选组合。其中，表11中第一列、第三列、第五列均表示上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)的值。表11的第二列、第四列以及第六列分别表示不同天线能力下传输层数和TPMI索引的可选组合。由表11可知，第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合。例如，终端设备的天线能力为完全相干(Fully coherent)，预编码信息和层数字段的值为1，则第一值＝1，则指示传输层数和TPMI索引的2个组合分别是：第一组合：rank＝1和TPMI＝1；第二组合：rank＝5和TPMI＝1。又例如第一值可以为8，此时指示传输层数和TPMI索引的2个组合分别是：第一组合：rank＝2和TPMI＝0；第二组合：rank＝6和TPMI＝0。(1) According to the above corresponding relationship, the embodiment of the present application encodes the combinations of rank=1 to 4 and their corresponding TPMI indexes, and the combinations of rank=5 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes in a table. As shown in Table 11 below, Table 11 shows the optional combinations of the TPMI index and the number of transmission layers for the 8-antenna port. That is to say, Table 11 shows the optional combinations of layers 1 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes. . The first column, the third column, and the fifth column in Table 11 all represent the values of the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields). The second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 11 respectively represent the optional combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities. It can be seen from Table 11 that the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. For example, if the antenna capability of the terminal device is fully coherent, and the value of the precoding information and layer number fields is 1, then the first value = 1, then the two combinations indicating the transmission layer number and TPMI index are: The first combination: rank=1 and TPMI=1; the second combination: rank=5 and TPMI=1. For another example, the first value may be 8. In this case, the two combinations indicating the number of transport layers and the TPMI index are respectively: the first combination: rank=2 and TPMI=0; the second combination: rank=6 and TPMI=0.
可理解，表11中的一个TPMI索引标识一个预编码矩阵，本申请不限制表11中TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵。It can be understood that a TPMI index in Table 11 identifies a precoding matrix, and this application does not limit the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index in Table 11.
表11：8天线端口，TPMI索引和传输层数(即rank)的可选组合(transform precoder未开启,ul-FullPowerTransmission没有被配置，或者配置为fullpowerMode2或fullpower)











Table 11: Optional combinations of 8 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)











可理解，对于预编码码本，如前述表1到前述表4，可以看出在天线端口数不变的情况下，随着传输层数(即rank)的增加，码本集合中可选的预编码矩阵数目减少。那么，8天线端口下rank＝5～8对应的TPMI索引的范围不大于8天线端口下rank＝1～4对应的TPMI索引的范围。所以，表11中第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)的部分值指示传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引的2个组合，而另外部分值指示传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引的1个组合。It can be understood that for the precoding codebook, as shown in the aforementioned Table 1 to the aforementioned Table 4, it can be seen that when the number of antenna ports remains unchanged, as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) increases, the optional codebook set The number of precoding matrices is reduced. Then, the range of the TPMI index corresponding to rank = 5 to 8 under the 8-antenna port is not greater than the range of the TPMI index corresponding to the rank = 1 to 4 under the 8-antenna port. Therefore, some values of the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields) in Table 11 indicate two combinations of the transmission layer number (i.e., rank) and TPMI index, while the other part values indicate the transmission layer number (i.e., rank). and 1 combination of TPMI index.
本申请实施例建立rank＝1～4与rank＝5～8的对应关系，基于该对应关系，使第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，即将2种rank和对应的TPMI索引的指示编码在表格的同一行中，对应同一个指示索引值，相比于按照NR协议中4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示方式扩展8天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示，减少了指示开销。可理解，NR协议中4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示方式是一个值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的一个组合。因为8天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的可选组合多于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的可选组合，所以8天线端口所需的指示比特多于4天线端口所需的指示比特(如前述表5所示，4天线端口需要6比特(26＝64)的指示开销)。而如果8天线端口仍然采用4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示方式(即预编码信息和层数字段的一个值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的一个组合)，则8天线端口下所需要的指示比特更多，至少需要9比特(29＝512)，而本申请实施例表11只需要8比特(28＝256)来指示。因此，本申请实施例减少了1比特的指示开销。The embodiment of the present application establishes a corresponding relationship between rank=1~4 and rank=5~8. Based on this corresponding relationship, the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value, which value indicates the transmission layer. Multiple combinations of numbers and TPMI indexes, that is, the indications of the two ranks and the corresponding TPMI indexes are encoded in the same row of the table, corresponding to the same indication index value. Compared with the number of transmission layers and the number of 4 antenna ports in the NR protocol The combined indication method of TPMI index extends the number of transmission layers of the 8-antenna port and the combined indication of TPMI index, reducing the indication overhead. It can be understood that the combined indication method of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index of the 4-antenna port in the NR protocol is a value indicating a combination of the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index. Because there are more optional combinations of the transmission layer number and TPMI index for the 8-antenna port than there are for the 4-antenna port, the 8-antenna port requires more indication bits than the 4-antenna port. bits (as shown in the aforementioned Table 5, a 4-antenna port requires 6 bits (2 6 =64) of indication overhead). If the 8-antenna port still uses the combined indication method of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of the 4-antenna port (that is, a value in the precoding information and layer number fields indicates a combination of the transmission layer number and TPMI index), then the 8-antenna port More indication bits are required, at least 9 bits (2 9 =512), while Table 11 of the embodiment of this application only requires 8 bits (2 8 =256) for indication. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application reduces the indication overhead by 1 bit.
(2)根据上述对应关系(rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应，rank＝3与rank＝7对应，rank＝4与rank＝8对应)，本申请实施例将rank＝1和rank＝5分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表12a和表12b所示；将rank＝2和rank＝6分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表13a和表13b所示；将rank＝3和rank＝7分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表14a和表14b所示；将rank＝4和rank＝8分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表15a和表15b所示。表12a、表13a、表14a以及表15a以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，而表12b、表13b、表14b以及表15b以 双符号Type 2 DMRS为例。为便于描述，下文以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例进行示例说明。(2) According to the above corresponding relationships (rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, rank=2 corresponds to rank=6, rank=3 corresponds to rank=7, rank=4 corresponds to rank=8), the embodiment of the present application will The DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 and rank=5 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 12a and Table 12b below; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=2 and rank=6 are encoded in a table. , as shown in the following tables 13a and 13b; encode the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=3 and rank=7 respectively in a table, as shown in the following tables 14a and 14b; encode rank=4 and rank=8 The corresponding DMRS port indexes are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 15a and Table 15b below. Table 12a, Table 13a, Table 14a and Table 15a take dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, while Table 12b, Table 13b, Table 14b and Table 15b take Take dual-symbol Type 2 DMRS as an example. For ease of description, the following uses dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example.
其中，表12a到表15b中第一列表示上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)的值，第三列表示相应值指示的DMRS端口索引。表12a到表15b中第二列和第四列参数的含义可参考现有标准或协议，这里不一一详述。示例性的，第二指示信息的值可以属于多个集合中的一个，这多个集合包含第一集合和第二集合，第一集合和第二集合可以通过DMRS端口索引数进行区分。具体的，同一集合中每个值指示的DMRS端口索引数相同，不同集合中的值指示的DMRS端口索引数不相同，也就是说第一集合中任一值指示的DMRS端口索引数与第二集合中任一值指示的DMRS端口索引数不相同。举例来说，对于表12a，第一集合为0到13(包含0和13)，第二集合为14；对于表12b，第一集合为0到27(包含0和27)，第二集合包含28和29。对于表13a，第一集合为0到9(包含0和9)，第二集合为10；对于表13b，第一集合为0到18(包含0和18)，第二集合包括19和20。对于表14a，第一集合为0到2(包含0和2)，第二集合为3；对于表14b，第一集合为0到5(包含0和5)，第二集合为6。对于表15a，第一集合为0到3(包含0和3)，第二集合为4；对于表15b，第一集合为0到4(包含0和4)，第二集合为5。Among them, the first column in Table 12a to Table 15b represents the value of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column represents the DMRS port index indicated by the corresponding value. The meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in Table 12a to Table 15b can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here. For example, the value of the second indication information may belong to one of multiple sets. The multiple sets include a first set and a second set. The first set and the second set may be distinguished by a DMRS port index number. Specifically, the DMRS port index number indicated by each value in the same set is the same, and the DMRS port index number indicated by the values in different sets is different. That is to say, the DMRS port index number indicated by any value in the first set is different from the DMRS port index number indicated by the second set. The number of DMRS port indexes indicated by any value in the set is not the same. For example, for table 12a, the first set is 0 to 13 (including 0 and 13), and the second set is 14; for table 12b, the first set is 0 to 27 (including 0 and 27), and the second set includes 28 and 29. For table 13a, the first set is 0 to 9 (including 0 and 9), and the second set is 10; for table 13b, the first set is 0 to 18 (including 0 and 18), and the second set includes 19 and 20. For table 14a, the first set is 0 to 2 (inclusive of 0 and 2), and the second set is 3; for table 14b, the first set is 0 to 5 (inclusive of 0 and 5), and the second set is 6. For table 15a, the first set is 0 to 3 (including 0 and 3), and the second set is 4; for table 15b, the first set is 0 to 4 (including 0 and 4), and the second set is 5.
表12a：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1和5
Table 12a: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1 and 5
表12b：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝2，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1和5

Table 12b: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=2, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1 and 5

可理解，表12a利用rank＝1对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表6)的预留值(14或15)来指示rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表12a仅是示例，具体使用哪个预留值(14或15)指示rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任5个，本申请实施例中rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引不局限于上述表12a所示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,2,3,4)。表12b与表12a类似，这里不一一详述。It can be understood that Table 12a uses the reserved value (14 or 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1 (the aforementioned Table 6) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5. It can also be understood that Table 12a is only an example. Which reserved value (14 or 15) is specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5 can be any 5 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. In the embodiment of the present application, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5 is not limited to the above. DMRS port index shown in Table 12a (i.e. 0,1,2,3,4). Table 12b is similar to Table 12a and will not be described in detail here.
表13a：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2和6
Table 13a: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2 and 6
表13b：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝2，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2和6

Table 13b: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=2, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2 and 6

可理解，表13a利用rank＝2对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表7)的预留值(10到15)来指示rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表13a仅是示例，具体使用哪个预留值(10到15中任一个)指示rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任6个，本申请实施例中rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引不局限于上述表13a所示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,2,3,4,6)。表13b与表13a类似，这里不一一详述。It can be understood that Table 13a uses the reserved values (10 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=2 (the aforementioned Table 7) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6. It can also be understood that Table 13a is only an example. Which reserved value (any one from 10 to 15) is specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6 can be any 6 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. In the embodiment of the present application, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6 is not limited to the above. DMRS port index shown in Table 13a (i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,6). Table 13b is similar to Table 13a and will not be described in detail here.
表14a：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3和7
Table 14a: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3 and 7
表14b：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝2，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3和7
Table 14b: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=2, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3 and 7
可理解，表14a利用rank＝3对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表8)的预留值(3到15)来指示rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表14a仅是示例，具体使用哪个预留值(3到15中任一个)指示rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任7个，本申请实施例中rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引不局限于上述表14a所示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,2,3,4,5,6)。表14b与表14a类似，这里不一一详述。It can be understood that Table 14a uses the reserved values (3 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=3 (the aforementioned Table 8) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7. It can also be understood that Table 14a is only an example. Which reserved value (any one from 3 to 15) is specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7 can be any 7 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. In the embodiment of the present application, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7 is not limited to the above. DMRS port index shown in Table 14a (i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,5,6). Table 14b is similar to Table 14a and will not be described in detail here.
表15a：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4和8

Table 15a: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4 and 8

表15b：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝2，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4和8
Table 15b: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=2, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4 and 8
可理解，表15a利用rank＝4对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表9)的预留值(4到15)来指示rank＝8对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表15a仅是示例，具体使用哪个预留值(4到15中任一个)指示rank＝8对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。表15b与表15a类似，这里不一一详述。It can be understood that Table 15a uses the reserved values (4 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=4 (the aforementioned Table 9) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=8. It can also be understood that Table 15a is only an example. Which reserved value (any one from 4 to 15) is specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=8, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. Table 15b is similar to Table 15a and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，上述表12a到表15b是以双符号Type 1 DMRS和双符号Type 2 DMRS为例，上述DMRS端口索引表格仅为示例。对于其它的DMRS类型同样适用，例如单符号Type 1 DMRS和Type 2 DMRS。It can be understood that the above-mentioned Tables 12a to 15b take dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS and dual-symbol Type 2 DMRS as examples, and the above-mentioned DMRS port index table is only an example. The same applies to other DMRS types, such as single-symbol Type 1 DMRS and Type 2 DMRS.
可理解，对于DMRS端口索引，为了保证不同传输层数(即rank)对应的DCI信令长度相同，DMRS端口索引表格中出现了大量的保留(reserved)选项。如前述表6到前述表9所示，rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引指示开销为4比特，其中rank＝1对应的DMRS端口索引表(如前述表6)中存在2个保留选项，rank＝2对应的DMRS端口索引表(如前述表7)中存在6个保留选项，rank＝3对应的DMRS端口索引表(如前述表8)中存在13个保留选项，rank＝4对应的DMRS端口索引表(如前述表9)中存在12个保留选项。由此可知，随着传输层数(即rank)的增加，DMRS端口索引的可选组合越来越少。也就是说，rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引的可选组合数目小于rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引的可选组合数目。It can be understood that for the DMRS port index, in order to ensure that the DCI signaling lengths corresponding to different transmission layer numbers (ie, ranks) are the same, a large number of reserved options appear in the DMRS port index table. As shown in the aforementioned Table 6 to the aforementioned Table 9, the DMRS port index indication overhead corresponding to rank=1~4 is 4 bits, and there are 2 reserved options in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1 (such as the aforementioned Table 6). There are 6 reserved options in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=2 (such as the aforementioned Table 7). There are 13 reserved options in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=3 (such as the aforementioned Table 8). The DMRS corresponding to rank=4 There are 12 reserved options in the port index table (such as Table 9 mentioned above). It can be seen that as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) increases, there are fewer and fewer optional combinations of DMRS port indexes. That is to say, the number of optional combinations of DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=5-8 is smaller than the number of optional combinations of DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1-4.
基于此，本申请实施例将存在对应关系的两个rank对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用现有NR协议中rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格中的预留值(或冗余位)，来指示rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引，不会增加DMRS端口索引指示的比特开销；也无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，可以减少冗余指示位。Based on this, the embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have a corresponding relationship in a table, and uses the reserved values in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank = 1 to 4 in the existing NR protocol ( or redundant bits) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5~8, which will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port index indication; there is no need to add 4 additional DMRS port index tables, which can reduce redundant indication bits.
可理解，上述对应关系(rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应，rank＝3与rank＝7对应，rank＝4与rank＝8对应)具有固定的偏移(offset)，基于该对应关系的rank和TPMI索引的可选组合指示以及DMRS端口索引指示，更简单直接。It can be understood that the above corresponding relationships (rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, rank=2 corresponds to rank=6, rank=3 corresponds to rank=7, rank=4 corresponds to rank=8) have a fixed offset. ), the optional combination indication of rank and TPMI index and the DMRS port index indication based on the corresponding relationship are simpler and more direct.
可理解，虽然上述示例(表11到表15b)均是以8天线端口，最大支持8层的上行传输为例，但本申请还可以适用于大于4层的其他传输层数的上行传输，比如最大6层的上行传输。6天线端口下第一指示信息和第二指示信息的实现方式(即rank和TPMI索引的组合指示方式，以及DMRS端口索引的指示方式)可以参考8天线端口时的实现方式，这里不一一赘述。6天线端口下可以将rank＝5～6与rank＝1～2建立一一对应的关系，rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应；6天线端口下如何指示传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引的组合，以及如何指示DMRS端口索引，可以参考8天线端口下的指示方式，这里不一一详述。还可理解，下文为便于描述，以8天线端口为例进行说明。It can be understood that although the above examples (Table 11 to Table 15b) are all based on 8 antenna ports and a maximum of 8 layers of uplink transmission, this application can also be applied to uplink transmission of other transmission layers greater than 4 layers, such as Uplink transmission of up to 6 layers. The implementation method of the first indication information and the second indication information under 6 antenna ports (that is, the combined indication method of rank and TPMI index, and the indication method of DMRS port index) can refer to the implementation method under 8 antenna ports, and will not be described here. . Under the 6-antenna port, a one-to-one correspondence can be established between rank=5~6 and rank=1~2. Rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, and rank=2 corresponds to rank=6. How to indicate the transmission layer under the 6-antenna port? The combination of number (i.e. rank) and TPMI index, and how to indicate the DMRS port index, can refer to the indication method under the 8-antenna port, which will not be described in detail here. It can also be understood that, for convenience of description, 8 antenna ports are used as an example for description below.
可选的，在发送端，网络设备可以结合上述表11和表12a到表15b来联合指示为终端设备配置的传输层数(即rank)、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引。举例来说，基于上述表11，如果网络设备想要指示rank＝5，TPMI＝2的这个组合，则网络设备需要将第一指示信息的值设为2，且需要将第二指示信息的值设为第二集合中的值(比如表12a中的14)。Optionally, at the sending end, the network device can combine the above-mentioned Table 11 and Table 12a to Table 15b to jointly indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index configured for the terminal device. For example, based on the above Table 11, if the network device wants to indicate the combination of rank = 5 and TPMI = 2, the network device needs to set the value of the first indication information to 2 and the value of the second indication information. Let be the value in the second set (such as 14 in Table 12a).
相应的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)以及自己的天线能力，确定网络设备指示的传输层数(即rank)、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引。一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备接收到上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)后，根据上述多个组合中的传输层数确定DMRS端口 索引表格，进而确定第一集合包含的值和第二集合包含的值；再可以根据该第二指示信息的值属于哪个集合和终端设备自己的天线能力，从上述多个组合中确定一个组合。示例性的，如果该第二指示信息的值属于第一集合，则终端设备确定第一组合，该第一组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。如果该第二指示信息的值属于第二集合，则终端设备确定第二组合，该第二组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。举例来说，如果第一指示信息的值为0，且终端设备的天线能力为Partial coherent(部分相干)，则指示的多个组合分别是第一组合：rank＝1，TPMI＝0，和第二组合：rank＝5，TPMI＝0。终端设备可以确定这多个组合中的传输层数为1和5，则可以确定DMRS端口索引表格为上述表12a(以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例)。由上述表12a可知，第一集合为0-13，第二集合为14；如果第二指示信息的值为0到13中的一个值，例如5，属于第一集合，则终端设备可以确定网络设备指示的是第一组合：rank＝1，TPMI＝0。若第二指示信息的值为14，属于第二集合，则终端设备可以确定网络设备指示的是第二组合：rank＝5，TPMI＝0。Correspondingly, at the receiving end, the terminal device can determine the network device by combining the received first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above second indication information (such as the antenna port field) and its own antenna capabilities. Indicates the number of transport layers (i.e. rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index. In a possible implementation, after the terminal device receives the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), according to the transmission layer in the above-mentioned multiple combinations number determines the DMRS port Index the table to determine the values contained in the first set and the values contained in the second set; and then determine a combination from the above multiple combinations according to which set the value of the second indication information belongs to and the terminal device's own antenna capability. For example, if the value of the second indication information belongs to the first set, the terminal device determines the first combination. The number of transmission layers and the TPMI index in the first combination are the uplink transmission configuration configured by the network device for the terminal device. Number of layers and TPMI. If the value of the second indication information belongs to the second set, the terminal device determines the second combination. The number of transport layers and the TPMI index in the second combination are the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission configured by the network device for the terminal device. . For example, if the value of the first indication information is 0, and the antenna capability of the terminal device is Partial coherent, then the multiple indicated combinations are the first combination: rank=1, TPMI=0, and the third combination. Second combination: rank=5, TPMI=0. The terminal equipment can determine that the number of transmission layers in these multiple combinations is 1 and 5, and then it can determine the DMRS port index table as the above table 12a (taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example). It can be seen from the above table 12a that the first set is 0-13 and the second set is 14; if the value of the second indication information is a value from 0 to 13, such as 5, which belongs to the first set, the terminal device can determine the network The device indicates the first combination: rank=1, TPMI=0. If the value of the second indication information is 14 and belongs to the second set, the terminal device can determine that the network device indicates the second combination: rank=5, TPMI=0.
另一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备接收到上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)后，可以根据上述多个组合中的传输层数和上述第二指示信息的值，确定该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引有哪些，再可以根据该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数和自己的天线能力，从上述多个组合中确定一个组合。示例性的，如果该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与上述第一组合中的传输层数相同，则终端设备确定第一组合，该第一组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。如果该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数与上述第二组合中的传输层数相同，则终端设备确定第二组合，该第二组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。In another possible implementation, after the terminal device receives the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), the terminal device can, according to the above multiple combinations, The number of transmission layers and the value of the above-mentioned second indication information determine which DMRS port indexes are indicated by the second indication information. Then, based on the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information and the own antenna capability, the above-mentioned Determine one combination among multiple combinations. For example, if the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers in the first combination, the terminal device determines the first combination, the number of transmission layers and the TPMI index in the first combination. That is, the number of uplink transmission transmission layers and TPMI configured by the network device for the terminal device. If the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of transmission layers in the second combination, the terminal device determines the second combination, and the number of transmission layers and TPMI index in the second combination are the network equipment. Configure the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission on the terminal device.
举例来说，假设第一指示信息的值为3，如果终端设备的天线能力为Partial coherent(部分相干)，则指示的rank和TPMI的2种组合分别为：rank＝1和TPMI＝3(即第一组合)；rank＝5和TPMI＝3(即第二组合)。终端设备可以确定网络设备指示的rank为1或者rank为5，以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，对应的DMRS端口索引表格为上述表12a。若第二指示信息的值为0到13中的一个值，例如0，则表示网络设备指示的是rank＝1，对应的DMRS端口索引为0，相应的可以确定TPMI＝3。若第二指示信息的值为14，则表示网络设备指示的是rank＝5，对应的DMRS端口索引为0到4，相应的可以确定TPMI＝3。For example, assuming that the value of the first indication information is 3, if the antenna capability of the terminal device is Partial coherent, the two indicated combinations of rank and TPMI are respectively: rank=1 and TPMI=3 (i.e. The first combination); rank=5 and TPMI=3 (that is, the second combination). The terminal device can determine that the rank indicated by the network device is 1 or 5. Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, the corresponding DMRS port index table is the above table 12a. If the value of the second indication information is a value from 0 to 13, such as 0, it means that the network device indicates rank=1, the corresponding DMRS port index is 0, and accordingly TPMI=3 can be determined. If the value of the second indication information is 14, it means that the network device indicates rank=5, the corresponding DMRS port index is 0 to 4, and accordingly TPMI=3 can be determined.
本申请实施例的终端设备通过第一指示信息的值，确定一个或多个rank值和这一个或多个rank值分别对应的TPMI索引，再根据第二指示信息的值，确定具体的rank值和DMRS端口索引，进一步确定该rank值对应的TPMI索引。不仅可以支持8天线端口的传输层数(最大8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示以及8天线端口的DMRS端口索引的指示，减少指示开销，还可以支持最大8层的上行传输，进而可以提高传输性能。The terminal device in the embodiment of the present application determines one or more rank values and the TPMI index corresponding to the one or more rank values through the value of the first indication information, and then determines the specific rank value based on the value of the second indication information. and DMRS port index to further determine the TPMI index corresponding to the rank value. It not only supports the combined indication of the number of transmission layers (maximum 8 layers) and TPMI index of 8-antenna ports and the indication of DMRS port index of 8-antenna ports, reducing indication overhead, but also supports uplink transmission of up to 8 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
另一个示例中，以rank＝1与rank＝8对应，rank＝2与rank＝7对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应，rank＝4与rank＝5对应为例。In another example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=8, rank=2 corresponds to rank=7, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=5.
(1)根据上述对应关系，本申请实施例将rank＝1～4和其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合、与rank＝5～8和其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合编码在一张表格中。如下述表16所示，表16示出了8天线端口的TPMI索引和传输层数的可选组合，也就是说表16示出了1层到8层与其分别对应的TPMI索引的可选组合。其中，表16中第一列、第三列、第五列均表示上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)的值。表16的第二列、第四列以及第六列分别表示不同天线能力下传输层数和TPMI索引的可选组合。由表16可知，第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合。例如，终端设备的天线能力为完全相干(Fully coherent)，预编码信息和层数字段的值为8，则指示传输层数和TPMI索引的2个组合分别是：rank＝2和TPMI＝0；rank＝7和TPMI＝0。(1) According to the above corresponding relationship, the embodiment of the present application encodes the combinations of rank=1 to 4 and their corresponding TPMI indexes, and the combinations of rank=5 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes in a table. As shown in Table 16 below, Table 16 shows the optional combinations of the TPMI index and the number of transmission layers for the 8-antenna port. That is to say, Table 16 shows the optional combinations of layers 1 to 8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes. . The first column, the third column, and the fifth column in Table 16 all represent the values of the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number fields). The second, fourth and sixth columns of Table 16 respectively represent the optional combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index under different antenna capabilities. It can be seen from Table 16 that the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value, which value indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index. For example, if the antenna capability of the terminal device is fully coherent, and the value of the precoding information and layer number fields is 8, then the two combinations indicating the number of transmission layers and TPMI index are: rank=2 and TPMI=0; rank=7 and TPMI=0.
可理解，表16中的一个TPMI索引标识一个预编码矩阵，本申请不限制表16中TPMI索引所标识的预编码矩阵。It can be understood that a TPMI index in Table 16 identifies a precoding matrix, and this application does not limit the precoding matrix identified by the TPMI index in Table 16.
表16：8天线端口，TPMI索引和传输层数(即rank)的可选组合(transform precoder未开启,ul-FullPowerTransmission没有被配置，或者配置为fullpowerMode2或fullpower)











Table 16: Optional combinations of 8 antenna ports, TPMI index and transmission layer number (i.e. rank) (transform precoder is not enabled, ul-FullPowerTransmission is not configured, or configured as fullpowerMode2 or fullpower)











可理解，随着传输层数(即rank)的增加，码本集合中可选的预编码矩阵数目减少。那么，8天线端口下rank＝5～8对应的TPMI索引的范围不大于8天线端口下rank＝1～4对应的TPMI索引的范围。It can be understood that as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) increases, the number of optional precoding matrices in the codebook set decreases. Then, the range of the TPMI index corresponding to rank = 5 to 8 under the 8-antenna port is not greater than the range of the TPMI index corresponding to the rank = 1 to 4 under the 8-antenna port.
本申请实施例建立rank＝1～4与rank＝5～8的对应关系，基于该对应关系，使第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，即将2种rank和对应的TPMI索引的指示编码在表格的同一行中，对应同一个指示索引值，相比于按照NR协议中4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示方式扩展8天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示，减少了指示开销。The embodiment of the present application establishes a corresponding relationship between rank=1~4 and rank=5~8. Based on this corresponding relationship, the first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) has at least one value, which value indicates the transmission layer. Multiple combinations of numbers and TPMI indexes, that is, the indications of the two ranks and the corresponding TPMI indexes are encoded in the same row of the table, corresponding to the same indication index value. Compared with the number of transmission layers and the number of 4 antenna ports in the NR protocol The combined indication method of TPMI index extends the number of transmission layers of the 8-antenna port and the combined indication of TPMI index, reducing the indication overhead.
(2)以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，根据上述对应关系(rank＝1与rank＝8对应，rank＝2与rank＝7对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应，rank＝4与rank＝5对应)，本申请实施例将rank＝1和rank＝8分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表17所示；将rank＝2和rank＝7分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表18所示；将rank＝3和rank＝6分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表19所示；将rank＝4和rank＝5分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表20所示。(2) Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, according to the above corresponding relationships (rank=1 corresponds to rank=8, rank=2 corresponds to rank=7, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6, rank=4 corresponds to rank= 5 corresponding), the embodiment of this application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 and rank=8 respectively in a table, as shown in the following Table 17; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=2 and rank=7 respectively Encode in a table, as shown in the following Table 18; encode the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=3 and rank=6 respectively in a table, as shown in the following Table 19; encode rank=4 and rank=5 The corresponding DMRS port indexes are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 20 below.
其中，表17到表20中第一列表示上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)的值，第三列表示相应值指示的DMRS端口索引。表17到表20中第二列和第四列参数的含义可参考现有标准或协议，这里不一一详述。示例性的，第二指示信息的值可以属于多个集合中的一个，这多个集合包含第一集合和第二集合，第一集合和第二集合可以通过DMRS端口索引数进行区分。具体的，同一集合中每个值指示的DMRS端口索引数相同，不同集合中的值指示的DMRS端口索引数不相同，也就是说第一集合中任一值指示的DMRS端口索引数与第二集合中任一值指示的DMRS端口索引数不相同。这里不一一列举第一集合和第二集合。The first column in Table 17 to Table 20 represents the value of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column represents the DMRS port index indicated by the corresponding value. The meanings of the parameters in the second and fourth columns in Tables 17 to 20 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be detailed here. For example, the value of the second indication information may belong to one of multiple sets. The multiple sets include a first set and a second set. The first set and the second set may be distinguished by a DMRS port index number. Specifically, the DMRS port index number indicated by each value in the same set is the same, and the DMRS port index number indicated by the values in different sets is different. That is to say, the DMRS port index number indicated by any value in the first set is different from the DMRS port index number indicated by the second set. The number of DMRS port indexes indicated by any value in the set is not the same. The first set and the second set are not listed one by one here.
表17：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1和8

Table 17: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1 and 8

可理解，表17利用rank＝1对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表6)的预留值(14和15)来指示rank＝8对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，为了使DMRS占用一个码分复用(code division multiplexing，CDM)组，rank＝8对应的DMRS端口索引除了表17中value＝14所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,4,5,8,9,12,13)外，还可以是：2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15。It can be understood that Table 17 uses the reserved values (14 and 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1 (the aforementioned Table 6) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=8. It can also be understood that in order for DMRS to occupy a code division multiplexing (CDM) group, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=8 is in addition to the DMRS port index indicated by value=14 in Table 17 (i.e. 0, 1, 4 ,5,8,9,12,13), it can also be: 2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15.
表18：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2和7
Table 18: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2 and 7
可理解，表18利用rank＝2对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表7)的预留值(10到15)来指示rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表17仅是示例，具体使用哪些预留值(10到15)指示rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任7个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表18中value＝10和12所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,2,3,4,5,6)。It can be understood that Table 18 uses the reserved values (10 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=2 (the aforementioned Table 7) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7. It can also be understood that Table 17 is only an example. Which reserved values (10 to 15) are specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7 can be any 7 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. The embodiments of the present application are not limited to values=10 and 12 in the above Table 18. Indicated DMRS port index (i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,5,6).
可理解，为了使DMRS占用一个码分复用(CDM)组，rank＝7对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,4,5,8,9,12,13中的任7个或者2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15中的任7个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表18中value＝14所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,4,5,8,9,12)。It can be understood that in order for DMRS to occupy a code division multiplexing (CDM) group, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=7 can be any 7 of 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13 or 2. Any 7 of 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to the DMRS port index indicated by value = 14 in the above Table 18 (i.e. 0, 1, 4, 5, 8 ,9,12).
表19：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3和6

Table 19: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3 and 6

可理解，表19利用rank＝3对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表8)的预留值(3到15)来指示rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表19仅是示例，具体使用哪些预留值(3到15)指示rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任6个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表19中value＝3和5所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,2,3,4,6)。It can be understood that Table 19 uses the reserved values (3 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=3 (the aforementioned Table 8) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6. It can also be understood that Table 19 is only an example. Which reserved values (3 to 15) are specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6 can be any 6 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. The embodiments of the present application are not limited to values=3 and 5 in the above Table 19. Indicated DMRS port index (i.e. 0,1,2,3,4,6).
可理解，为了使DMRS占用一个码分复用(CDM)组，rank＝6对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,4,5,8,9,12,13中的任6个或者2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15中的任6个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表19中value＝4所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,4,5,8,9)。It can be understood that in order for DMRS to occupy a code division multiplexing (CDM) group, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=6 can be any 6 of 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13 or 2. Any 6 of 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to the DMRS port index indicated by value = 4 in the above Table 19 (i.e., 0, 1, 4, 5, 8 ,9).
表20：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4和5
Table 20: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4 and 5
可理解，表20利用rank＝4对应的DMRS端口索引表格(前述表9)的预留值(4到15)来指示rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引。还可理解，表20仅是示例，具体使用哪些预留值(4到15)指示rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引，本申请实施例不做限制。此外，rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7中的任5个或者8-15中任5个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表20中value＝4,5,7以及9所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0-4和8-12以及3,4,5,6,7)。It can be understood that Table 20 uses the reserved values (4 to 15) of the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=4 (the aforementioned Table 9) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5. It can also be understood that Table 20 is only an example. Which reserved values (4 to 15) are specifically used to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. In addition, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5 can be any 5 of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or any 5 of 8-15. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to the above table. DMRS port index indicated by value=4,5,7 and 9 in 20 (ie 0-4 and 8-12 and 3,4,5,6,7).
可理解，为了使DMRS占用一个码分复用(CDM)组，rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引可以是0,1,4,5,8,9,12,13中的任5个或者2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15中的任5个，本申请实施例不局限于上述表20中value＝6和8所指示的DMRS端口索引(即0,1,4,5,8和5,8,9,12,13)。It can be understood that in order for DMRS to occupy a code division multiplexing (CDM) group, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5 can be any 5 of 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13 or 2. Any 5 of 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to the DMRS port index indicated by value = 6 and 8 in the above Table 20 (i.e., 0, 1, 4, 5 ,8 and 5,8,9,12,13).
可理解，随着传输层数(即rank)的增加，DMRS端口索引的可选组合越来越少。那么，rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引的可选组合数目不大于rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引的可选组合数目。It is understandable that as the number of transmission layers (i.e., rank) increases, there are fewer and fewer optional combinations of DMRS port indexes. Then, the number of optional combinations of DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=5 to 8 is not greater than the number of optional combinations of DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 to 4.
基于此，本申请实施例将存在对应关系的两个rank的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，利用现有NR协议中rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格中的预留值(或冗余位)，来指示rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引；无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。Based on this, the embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes of two ranks with corresponding relationships in a table, and uses the reserved values in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank = 1 to 4 in the existing NR protocol (or Redundant bits) to indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5~8; there is no need to add 4 additional DMRS port index tables, no additional indication information overhead will be introduced, and redundant indication bits can be reduced.
此外，因为随着传输层数(即rank)的增加，也就是说从rank＝1到rank＝8，可选的码本数目逐渐减少，DMRS端口组合数也逐渐减少，所以采用上述对应关系(rank＝1与rank＝8对应，rank＝2与rank＝7对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应，rank＝4与rank＝5对应)，将DMRS端口索引组合最多的传输层数(1层)与DMRS端口索引组合最少的传输层数(8层)编码在一张表格中，可以最大程度的利用现有的冗余指示位， 节省开销。例如，针对DMRS端口索引扩展的情况，rank＝5对应的DMRS端口索引共需要6个值来指示，如果将rank＝1和rank＝5分别对应的DMRS端口索引放在一个DMRS端口索引表格中，因为rank＝1对应的DMRS端口索引表(如前述表6)中只存在2个保留选项，那么就需要增加1比特来指示。In addition, as the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) increases, that is, from rank=1 to rank=8, the number of optional codebooks gradually decreases, and the number of DMRS port combinations also gradually decreases, so the above correspondence relationship is adopted ( rank=1 corresponds to rank=8, rank=2 corresponds to rank=7, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6, rank=4 corresponds to rank=5), the number of transmission layers that combines the DMRS port index with the most (layer 1 ) is combined with the DMRS port index to encode the minimum number of transmission layers (eight layers) in a table, which can maximize the use of existing redundant indicator bits. Save money. For example, in the case of DMRS port index expansion, the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5 requires a total of 6 values to indicate. If the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 and rank=5 are placed in a DMRS port index table, Because there are only 2 reserved options in the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1 (such as the aforementioned Table 6), then 1 bit needs to be added to indicate.
可理解，虽然上述示例(表11到表15b)均是以8天线端口，最大支持8层的上行传输为例，但本申请还可以适用于大于4层的其他传输层数的上行传输，比如最大6层的上行传输。6天线端口下第一指示信息和第二指示信息的实现方式(即rank和TPMI索引的组合指示方式，以及DMRS端口索引的指示方式)可以参考8天线端口时的实现方式，这里不一一赘述。It can be understood that although the above examples (Table 11 to Table 15b) are all based on 8 antenna ports and a maximum of 8 layers of uplink transmission, this application can also be applied to uplink transmission of other transmission layers greater than 4 layers, such as Uplink transmission of up to 6 layers. The implementation method of the first indication information and the second indication information under 6 antenna ports (that is, the combined indication method of rank and TPMI index, and the indication method of DMRS port index) can refer to the implementation method under 8 antenna ports, and will not be described here. .
可选的，在发送端，网络设备可以结合上述表16和表17到表20来联合指示为终端设备配置的传输层数(即rank)、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引；具体参考前文的描述，这里不赘述。相应的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)以及自己的天线能力，确定网络设备指示传输层数(即rank)、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引；具体确定方式可以参考前文的描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, at the sending end, the network device can combine the above-mentioned Table 16 and Table 17 to Table 20 to jointly indicate the number of transmission layers (ie, rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index configured for the terminal device; for details, refer to the previous description, I won’t go into details here. Correspondingly, at the receiving end, the terminal device can determine the network device by combining the received first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field) and the above second indication information (such as the antenna port field) and its own antenna capabilities. Indicates the transmission layer number (i.e. rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index; the specific determination method can refer to the previous description, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例将低rank(比如rank＝1～4)和高rank(比如rank＝5～8)建立关联，使一个低rank及其对应的TPMI索引与一个高rank及其对应的TPMI索引编码在一个表格中，相比于按照NR协议中4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示方式扩展大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示，可以减少指示开销；并且低rank对应的TPMI索引不变，从而不影响rank＝1～4的TPMI索引指示。此外，本申请实施例还复用现有4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格，并基于建立的rank对应关系利用该4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余位(或预留值)来指示rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引，从而无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，因此不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。而本申请实施例的终端设备通过第一指示信息的值和第二指示信息的值以及自己的天线能力，联合确定自己进行上行传输时的传输层数(即rank)、TPMI索引以及DMRS端口索引。The embodiment of the present application associates low rank (for example, rank = 1 to 4) with high rank (for example, rank = 5 to 8), so that a low rank and its corresponding TPMI index are encoded with a high rank and its corresponding TPMI index. In a table, compared with extending the combined indication of the number of transmission layers and TPMI index of more than 4 antenna ports according to the combined indication method of the number of transmission layers and TPMI index of 4 antenna ports in the NR protocol, the indication overhead can be reduced; and low rank The corresponding TPMI index remains unchanged, thus not affecting the TPMI index indications of rank=1 to 4. In addition, the embodiment of the present application also reuses the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1~4 of the existing 4-antenna ports, and uses the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=1~4 of the 4-antenna port based on the established rank correspondence. The redundant bits (or reserved values) in the table indicate the DMRS port index corresponding to rank=5~8, so there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, so no additional indication information overhead is introduced, and redundant indications can be reduced Bit. The terminal device in the embodiment of the present application jointly determines the number of transmission layers (ie, rank), TPMI index and DMRS port index when performing uplink transmission through the value of the first indication information, the value of the second indication information and its own antenna capability. .
故，本申请实施例不仅可以支持大于4天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合指示以及大于4天线端口的DMRS端口索引指示，还可以在不影响兼容性的情况下，降低指示开销。Therefore, the embodiments of the present application can not only support the combined indication of the transmission layer number and TPMI index greater than 4 antenna ports and the DMRS port index indication greater than 4 antenna ports, but can also reduce the indication overhead without affecting compatibility.
实施例二Embodiment 2
本申请实施例二主要介绍基于低rank(如rank＝1～4)和高rank(如rank＝5～8)的对应关系，将rank＝1～8及其分别对应的TPMI索引的组合编码在一张表格中，并且该表格中至少存在一个值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，再通过指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个组合中的哪个组合。Embodiment 2 of this application mainly introduces the corresponding relationship between low rank (such as rank=1~4) and high rank (such as rank=5~8). The combination of rank=1~8 and their corresponding TPMI indexes is encoded in In a table, and there is at least one value in the table indicating multiple combinations of transport layer number and TPMI index, and then indicating which combination among the multiple combinations the network device allocates to the terminal device through indication information.
参见图5，图5是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第二种流程示意图。该方法中所涉及的终端设备可具备大于4个发送天线，比如本申请中的终端设备具备6个发送天线或8个发送天线。如图5所示，该信息指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：Referring to Figure 5, Figure 5 is a second schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas. For example, the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas. As shown in Figure 5, the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S201，网络设备发送第一指示信息和第三指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，第一指示信息至少有第一值，第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合；第三指示信息指示该多个组合中的一个组合。S201. The network device sends first indication information and third indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index. The transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information has at least a first value. , the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index; the third indication information indicates one of the multiple combinations.
相应的，终端设备接收该第一指示信息和该第三指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information and the third indication information.
S202，终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从该多个组合中确定一个组合。S202: The terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
可选的，上述第一指示信息和上述第三指示信息可以携带于一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第一指示信息和该第三指示信息可以携带于下行控制信息(DCI)信令中。举例来说，该第一指示信息可以是DCI信令中的precoding information and number of layers字段，用于指示传输层数(即rank)和该传输层数对应的TPMI索引的组合；该第三指示信息可以是DCI信令中的MCS字段、冗余版本(redundancy version)字段以及新数据指示(new data indicator)字段中的一项或多项，比如该第三指示信息是MCS字段和冗余版本字段。当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段取特殊值(如26)和这个码字对应的冗余版本字段也取特殊值(如1)时，用于联合指示该码字(codeword)没有被使能(disabled)；而当DCI信令中某个码字对应的MCS字段不为26或这个码字对应的冗余版本字段不为1，则表示该码字被使能(enabled)，此时该码字对应的MCS字段用于指示调度的MCS索引，该码字对应的冗余版本字段用于指示调度的数据对应的编码的冗余版本信息。Optionally, the above-mentioned first indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. For example, the first indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling. For example, the first indication information may be the precoding information and number of layers fields in DCI signaling, which is used to indicate the combination of the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and the TPMI index corresponding to the number of transmission layers; the third indication The information may be one or more of the MCS field, redundancy version field and new data indicator field in DCI signaling. For example, the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version. field. When the MCS field corresponding to a certain codeword in DCI signaling takes a special value (such as 26) and the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword also takes a special value (such as 1), it is used to jointly indicate the codeword (codeword) Not enabled (disabled); and when the MCS field corresponding to a codeword in DCI signaling is not 26 or the redundancy version field corresponding to this codeword is not 1, it means that the codeword is enabled (enabled) , at this time, the MCS field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index, and the redundant version field corresponding to the codeword is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data.
可选的，上述第一指示信息(如预编码信息和层数字段)的实现方式可以参考前述实施例一中的相关描述，这里不再赘述。本申请实施例中8天线端口的TPMI索引和传输层数的可选组合如前述表11或前述表16所示，这里也不再赘述。 Optionally, for the implementation of the above-mentioned first indication information (such as precoding information and layer number field), reference may be made to the relevant description in the foregoing Embodiment 1, which will not be described again here. The optional combinations of the TPMI index and the number of transmission layers for the 8-antenna ports in the embodiment of the present application are as shown in the aforementioned Table 11 or the aforementioned Table 16, and will not be described again here.
可理解，下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)用于调度小区内一个或多个PUSCH的传输，DCI包括：a)对于传输块(transport block)1，包含MCS、新数据指示(new data indicator)以及冗余版本(redundancy version)。b)如果高层信令maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI配置为2(也就是2个码字传输被使能)，则还包含传输块(transport block)2的相关字段：MCS、新数据指示以及冗余版本。其中，对于MCS表格中预设的编码码率和调制阶数组合，利用5比特的MCS字段指示调度的MCS。新数据指示(new data indicator)字段，用于指示调度的PUSCH是新传的数据还是重传的数据。冗余版本(redundancy version)字段，用于指示调度的数据对应的编码的冗余版本信息。DCI格式可以是format 0_1或format 0_2。It can be understood that downlink control information (DCI) is used to schedule the transmission of one or more PUSCHs in a cell. DCI includes: a) For transport block 1, it includes MCS, new data indicator (new data indicator) ) and redundancy version. b) If the high-level signaling maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI is configured as 2 (that is, 2 codeword transmission is enabled), it also includes the relevant fields of transport block 2: MCS, new data indication and redundancy version. Among them, for the preset coding code rate and modulation order combination in the MCS table, a 5-bit MCS field is used to indicate the scheduled MCS. The new data indicator field is used to indicate whether the scheduled PUSCH is newly transmitted data or retransmitted data. The redundancy version field is used to indicate the encoded redundancy version information corresponding to the scheduled data. The DCI format can be format 0_1 or format 0_2.
还可理解，如果高层信令maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI配置为2，则当DCI中2个传输块对应的字段中某一个传输块对应的字段指示IMCS＝26和rvid＝1，则表示该传输块没有被使能(或该传输块没有数据发送，仅有一个传输块被传输)。其中，IMCS＝26可以理解为MCS字段的取值为26，rvid＝1可以理解为冗余版本字段的取值为1。如果某一个传输块对应的MCS字段的取值不为26或冗余版本字段的取值不为1，则表示该传输块使能(enabled)；此时，MCS字段用于指示调度的MCS索引，冗余版本字段用于指示调度的数据对应的编码的冗余版本信息。当2个传输块都被使能(即2个传输块被传输)时，则传输块1和传输块2对应的字段分别对应codeword 0(码字0)和codeword 1(码字1)。如果只有一个传输块被使能(只有一个传输块被传输)，则被使能的传输块对应第一个codeword。It can also be understood that if the high-level signaling maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI is configured as 2, then when the field corresponding to one of the two transport blocks in the DCI indicates I MCS = 26 and rv id = 1, it means that the transport block has not been Enabled (or no data is sent for this transport block, only one transport block is transmitted). Among them, I MCS =26 can be understood as the value of the MCS field is 26, and rv id =1 can be understood as the value of the redundant version field is 1. If the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block is not 26 or the value of the redundant version field is not 1, it means that the transport block is enabled; at this time, the MCS field is used to indicate the scheduled MCS index. , the redundant version field is used to indicate the encoded redundant version information corresponding to the scheduled data. When both transport blocks are enabled (that is, two transport blocks are transmitted), the fields corresponding to transport block 1 and transport block 2 correspond to codeword 0 (codeword 0) and codeword 1 (codeword 1) respectively. If only one transport block is enabled (only one transport block is transmitted), the enabled transport block corresponds to the first codeword.
因此，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示两个码字(codeword)中的一个码字使能来指示上述多个组合中的第一组合。示例性的，网络设备将DCI中某一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值设置为26，且冗余版本字段的值设置为1，表示该传输块没有被使能(disabled)，也就是该传输块对应的码字没有被使能。此时两个码字(codeword)中一个码字使能(enabled)，另一个码字没有被使能(disabled)，用于表示上述第一指示信息指示的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合是上述多个组合中的第一组合。同理，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示上述多个组合中的第二组合。示例性的，DCI中任一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值不为26，或冗余版本字段的值不为1，表示2个传输块都被使能(enabled)，也就是这2个传输块分别对应的码字都被使能。此时两个码字(codeword)都使能(enabled)，用于表示上述第一指示信息指示的传输层数和TPMI索引的组合是上述多个组合中的第二组合。Therefore, the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination among the above-mentioned plurality of combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled. For example, the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transmission block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, indicating that the transmission block is not enabled (disabled), that is, the transmission The codeword corresponding to the block is not enabled. At this time, one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled (enabled) and the other codeword is not enabled (disabled), which is used to indicate that the combination of the transmission layer number and TPMI index indicated by the first indication information is The first combination among the above combinations. Similarly, the above third indication information may indicate the second combination among the above multiple combinations by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transmission block in DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, indicating that both transmission blocks are enabled (enabled), that is, these two transmissions The codewords corresponding to the blocks are all enabled. At this time, both codewords are enabled, which is used to indicate that the combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index indicated by the first indication information is the second combination among the multiple combinations.
可选的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第一指示信息和上述第三指示信息以及自己的天线能力，确定网络设备指示的传输层数(即rank)和TPMI索引。示例性的，当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备结合自己的天线能力从上述多个组合中确定第一组合，该第一组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示这两个码字都使能时，终端设备结合自己的天线能力从上述多个组合中确定第二组合，该第二组合中的传输层数和TPMI索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的上行传输的传输层数和TPMI。Optionally, at the receiving end, the terminal device can determine the number of transmission layers (ie, rank) and TPMI index indicated by the network device by combining the received first indication information, the above third indication information and its own antenna capabilities. For example, when the above-mentioned third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first combination from the above-mentioned multiple combinations in combination with its own antenna capability, and the first combination is The number of transport layers and TPMI index in the combination are the number of transport layers and TPMI for uplink transmission configured by the network device for the terminal device. When the above-mentioned third indication information received by the terminal equipment indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal equipment determines a second combination from the above-mentioned multiple combinations based on its own antenna capability. The number of transmission layers in the second combination and The TPMI index is the number of uplink transmission transport layers and TPMI configured by the network device for the terminal device.
举例来说，以前述表11所示8天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的可选组合为例。假设第一指示信息的值为8，如果终端设备的天线能力为Fully coherent(完全相干)，则指示的rank和TPMI的2种组合分别为：rank＝2和TPMI＝0(即第一组合)；rank＝6和TPMI＝0(即第二组合)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能，则终端设备确定网络设备指示的是rank＝2和TPMI＝0这个组合(即第一组合)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能，则终端设备确定网络设备指示的是rank＝6和TPMI＝0这个组合(即第二组合)。For example, take the optional combinations of the transmission layer number and TPMI index of the 8-antenna ports shown in Table 11 above. Assume that the value of the first indication information is 8, and if the antenna capability of the terminal device is Fully coherent (fully coherent), the two indicated combinations of rank and TPMI are respectively: rank=2 and TPMI=0 (i.e. the first combination) ;rank=6 and TPMI=0 (i.e. the second combination). If the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines that the network device indicates the combination of rank=2 and TPMI=0 (ie, the first combination). If the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines that the network device indicates the combination of rank=6 and TPMI=0 (ie, the second combination).
一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还可以包括：网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引。其中，无论该第二指示信息为何值，该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引都关联同一个传输层数(即rank)。也就是说，对于不同的rank值(rank＝1～8)，本申请实施例也可以定义不同的DMRS端口索引表格；即针对一个rank值，定义一个DMRS端口索引表格。示例性的，针对前述表12a到表15b(或者前述表17到表20)中rank＝5～8对应的DMRS端口索引可以额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，一张DMRS端口索引表格包括一个rank值对应的DMRS端口索引。In a possible implementation manner, the above information indication method may further include: the network device sends second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. No matter what the value of the second indication information is, the DMRS port index indicated by the second indication information is associated with the same transmission layer number (ie, rank). That is to say, for different rank values (rank=1~8), embodiments of the present application can also define different DMRS port index tables; that is, for one rank value, a DMRS port index table is defined. For example, four additional DMRS port index tables can be added to the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank = 5 to 8 in the aforementioned tables 12a to 15b (or the aforementioned tables 17 to 20), and one DMRS port index table includes a rank DMRS port index corresponding to the value.
另一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还可以包括：In another possible implementation, the above information indication method may also include:
S203，网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联该多个组合中的第一组合，当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联该多个组合中的第二组合。 S203. The network device sends second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets. The multiple sets include at least the first set and the second set. When When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination of the multiple combinations. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination of the multiple combinations. The second combination.
相应的，终端设备接收该第二指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second indication information.
S204，终端设备根据该第二指示信息的值，确定终端设备的DMRS端口索引。S204: The terminal device determines the DMRS port index of the terminal device according to the value of the second indication information.
可选的，上述第二指示信息可以与上述第一指示信息和/或上述第三指示信息携带于同一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第二指示信息也可以携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第二指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。其中，该第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)的具体实现可以参考前述实施例一中的相关描述，这里不再赘述。本申请实施例中不同rank(如rank＝1～8)对应的DMRS端口索引表格如前述表12a到表15b所示或者如前述表17到表20所示，这里也不再赘述。Optionally, the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried and sent in the same signaling as the above-mentioned first indication information and/or the above-mentioned third indication information, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. . For example, the second indication information may also be carried in DCI signaling. For example, the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index. For the specific implementation of the second indication information (such as the antenna port field), reference may be made to the relevant description in the foregoing Embodiment 1, which will not be described again here. In the embodiment of the present application, the DMRS port index tables corresponding to different ranks (such as rank=1 to 8) are as shown in the aforementioned tables 12a to 15b or as shown in the aforementioned tables 17 to 20, which will not be described again here.
可理解，该第二指示信息与上述第三指示信息相互关联。示例性的，如果上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能，则该第二指示信息的值属于第一集合；如果上述第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能，则该第二指示信息的值属于第二集合。It can be understood that the second indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information are related to each other. For example, if the above third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the value of the second indication information belongs to the first set; if the above third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, , then the value of the second indication information belongs to the second set.
本申请实施例将rank＝1～4(称为低rank)和rank＝5～8(称为高rank)建立关联，使一个低rank及其对应的TPMI索引与一个高rank及其对应的TPMI索引编码在一个表格中，并且低rank对应的TPMI索引不变，不仅可以支持8天线端口的传输层数(有1层到8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示，还可以在不影响兼容性的情况下，减少指示开销。此外，因为本申请实施例设计的8天线端口的rank和TPMI索引的可选组合表格中至少存在一个值指示多个组合的情况，所以本申请实施例还通过一个指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个组合中的哪个组合，以使终端设备可以唯一确定网络设备为其分配的传输层数和TPMI索引。本申请实施例还通过复用现有4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格，并基于建立的rank对应关系利用该4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余位(或预留值)指示rank＝5～8对应的DMTS端口索引，从而无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，因此不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。The embodiment of the present application associates rank=1 to 4 (called low rank) and rank=5 to 8 (called high rank), so that a low rank and its corresponding TPMI index are linked to a high rank and its corresponding TPMI index. The index is encoded in a table, and the TPMI index corresponding to low rank remains unchanged. It not only supports the combined indication of the transmission layer number of the 8-antenna port (there are 1 to 8 layers) and the TPMI index, but also can be used without affecting compatibility. case, reducing instruction overhead. In addition, because there is at least one value indicating multiple combinations in the optional combination table of rank and TPMI index of the 8-antenna ports designed in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal device through an indication information. Which of these multiple combinations is allocated so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the number of transport layers and TPMI index assigned to it by the network device. The embodiment of the present application also reuses the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1~4 of the existing 4-antenna ports, and uses the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1~4 of the 4-antenna port based on the established rank correspondence. The redundant bits (or reserved values) in indicate the DMTS port index corresponding to rank=5~8, so there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, so no additional indication information overhead is introduced, and redundant indication bits can be reduced.
实施例三Embodiment 3
本申请实施例三主要介绍基于低rank(如rank＝1～4)和高rank(如rank＝5～8)的对应关系，将存在对应关系的两个rank对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，并且该表格中至少存在一个值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，再通过指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个DMRS端口索引组中的哪个DMRS端口索引组。Embodiment 3 of this application mainly introduces the corresponding relationship between low rank (such as rank=1~4) and high rank (such as rank=5~8). The DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have corresponding relationships are encoded in one In the table, and there is at least one value in the table indicating multiple DMRS port index groups, the indication information is used to indicate which DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups the network device allocates to the terminal device.
参见图6，图6是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第三种流程示意图。该方法中所涉及的终端设备可具备大于4个发送天线，比如本申请中的终端设备具备6个发送天线或8个发送天线。如图6所示，该信息指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：Referring to Figure 6, Figure 6 is a third schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas. For example, the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas. As shown in Figure 6, the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S301，网络设备发送第四指示信息和第三指示信息，第四指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引，第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引，第三指示信息指示该多个DMRS端口索引组中的一个DMRS端口索引组。S301. The network device sends fourth indication information and third indication information. The fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index. The fourth indication information has at least a second value. The second value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each of which The DMRS port index group includes at least one DMRS port index, and the third indication information indicates one DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
相应的，终端设备接收该第四指示信息和该第三指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the fourth indication information and the third indication information.
S302，终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从该多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。S302: The terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the third indication information.
可选的，上述第四指示信息和上述第三指示信息可以携带于一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第四指示信息和该第三指示信息可以携带于下行控制信息(DCI)信令中。举例来说，该第四指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引；该第三指示信息可以是DCI信令中的MCS字段、冗余版本字段以及新数据指示字段中的一项或多项，比如该第三指示信息是MCS字段和冗余版本字段。具体MCS字段和冗余版本字段联合指示码字未被使能的方式参考前述实施例二的相关描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, the above-mentioned fourth indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. For example, the fourth indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling. For example, the fourth indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the DMRS port index; the third indication information may be the MCS field, redundancy version field and new data indication in DCI signaling. One or more of the fields, for example, the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundant version field. For a specific manner in which the MCS field and the redundancy version field jointly indicate that the codeword is not enabled, refer to the relevant description of the foregoing Embodiment 2, which will not be described again here.
可选的，上述第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)至少有一个值(为便于描述记为第二值)，这个值(即第二值)指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引。示例性的，这多个DMRS端口索引组至少包括第一DMRS端口索引组和第二DMRS端口索引组。该第一DMRS端口索引组和该第二DMRS端口索引组分别关联不同的传输层数。换句话说，该第一DMRS端口索引组包含的DMRS端口索引的个数与该第二DMRS端口索引组包含的DMRS端口索引的个数不相同。Optionally, the above-mentioned fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) has at least one value (recorded as the second value for ease of description). This value (ie, the second value) indicates multiple DMRS port index groups. Each DMRS port The index group includes at least one DMRS port index. Exemplarily, the multiple DMRS port index groups include at least a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group. The first DMRS port index group and the second DMRS port index group are respectively associated with different transmission layer numbers. In other words, the number of DMRS port indexes included in the first DMRS port index group is different from the number of DMRS port indexes included in the second DMRS port index group.
可选的，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第一DMRS端口索引组。示例性的，网络设备将DCI中某一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值设置为26，且冗余版本字段的值设置为1，来表示该传输块对应的码字没有被使能。同理，上述第三指示信息可 以通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示上述多个DMRS端口索引组中的第二DMRS端口索引组。示例性的，DCI中任一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值不为26，或冗余版本字段的值不为1，表示2个传输块分别对应的码字都被使能。可理解，本申请实施例中第三指示信息的含义与前述实施例二中第三指示信息的含义类似，不同之处在于：前述实施例二中第三指示信息通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示多个组合中的一个，而本申请实施例中的第三指示信息通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示多个DMRS组合中的一个。Optionally, the above third indication information may indicate the first DMRS port index group among the above multiple DMRS port index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled. For example, the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled. In the same way, the above third instruction information can be The second DMRS port index group among the plurality of DMRS port index groups is indicated by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, if the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transport block in the DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, it means that the codewords corresponding to the two transport blocks are both enabled. It can be understood that the meaning of the third indication information in the embodiment of the present application is similar to the meaning of the third indication information in the foregoing second embodiment. The difference is that: in the foregoing second embodiment, the third indication information indicates one of the two codewords. One codeword is enabled to indicate one of multiple combinations, and the third indication information in the embodiment of the present application indicates one of multiple DMRS combinations by indicating that one of two codewords is enabled.
可理解，为了支持大于4层的上行传输，需要对DMRS端口索引的指示进行设计。下面举例说明本申请实施例中第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)如何指示DMRS端口索引。It is understandable that in order to support uplink transmission greater than layer 4, the indication of the DMRS port index needs to be designed. The following is an example of how the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) indicates the DMRS port index in the embodiment of the present application.
一个示例中，将rank＝5～8与rank＝1～4建立一一对应的关系。以rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应，rank＝3与rank＝7对应，rank＝4与rank＝8对应为例。以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，根据该对应关系，本申请实施例将rank＝1和rank＝5分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表21所示；将rank＝2和rank＝6分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表22所示；将rank＝3和rank＝7分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表23所示；将rank＝4和rank＝8分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表24所示。其中，表21到表24中第一列表示上述第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)的值，第三列和第六列表示不同rank对应的DMRS端口索引。表21到表24中其它列参数的含义可参考现有标准或协议，这里不一一详述。由表21到表24可知，第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示多个DMRS端口索引组。例如，rank＝1或rank＝5，天线端口字段的值为3，则指示的2个DMRS端口索引组分别是：1(即第一DMRS端口索引组)；0,1,2,3,4(即第二DMRS端口索引组)。In an example, a one-to-one correspondence is established between rank=5~8 and rank=1~4. For example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, rank=2 corresponds to rank=6, rank=3 corresponds to rank=7, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=8. Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, according to the corresponding relationship, the embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 and rank=5 respectively in a table, as shown in the following Table 21; rank=2 The DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=6 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 22 below; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=3 and rank=7 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 23 below. shown; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=4 and rank=8 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 24 below. Among them, the first column in Table 21 to Table 24 represents the value of the above-mentioned fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column and the sixth column represent the DMRS port index corresponding to different ranks. The meanings of other column parameters in Table 21 to Table 24 can refer to existing standards or protocols, and will not be described in detail here. It can be seen from Table 21 to Table 24 that the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) has at least one value, and the value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups. For example, rank=1 or rank=5, and the value of the antenna port field is 3, then the two indicated DMRS port index groups are: 1 (i.e., the first DMRS port index group); 0,1,2,3,4 (i.e. the second DMRS port index group).
表21：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1和5
Table 21: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1 and 5
表22：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2和6

Table 22: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2 and 6

表23：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3和7
Table 23: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3 and 7
表24：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4和8

Table 24: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4 and 8

另一个示例中，以rank＝1与rank＝8对应，rank＝2与rank＝7对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应，rank＝4与rank＝5对应为例。以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，根据该对应关系，本申请实施例将rank＝1和rank＝8分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表25所示；将rank＝2和rank＝7分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表26所示；将rank＝3和rank＝6分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表27所示；将rank＝4和rank＝5分别对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，如下述表28所示。其中，表25到表28中第一列表示上述第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)的值，第三列和第六列表示不同rank对应的DMRS端口索引。由表25到表28可知，第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示多个DMRS端口索引组。例如，rank＝1或rank＝8，天线端口字段的值为1，则指示的2个DMRS端口索引组分别是：1(即第一DMRS端口索引组)；0,1,4,5,8,9,12,13(即第二DMRS端口索引组)。In another example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=8, rank=2 corresponds to rank=7, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=5. Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, according to the corresponding relationship, the embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=1 and rank=8 respectively in a table, as shown in the following Table 25; rank=2 The DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=7 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 26 below; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=3 and rank=6 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 27 below. shown; the DMRS port indexes corresponding to rank=4 and rank=5 are encoded in a table, as shown in Table 28 below. Among them, the first column in Table 25 to Table 28 represents the value of the above-mentioned fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the third column and the sixth column represent the DMRS port index corresponding to different ranks. It can be seen from Table 25 to Table 28 that there is at least one value in the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field), and the value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups. For example, rank=1 or rank=8, and the value of the antenna port field is 1, then the two indicated DMRS port index groups are: 1 (i.e., the first DMRS port index group); 0, 1, 4, 5, 8 ,9,12,13 (that is, the second DMRS port index group).
表25：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝1和8
Table 25: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=1 and 8
表26：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝2和7
Table 26: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=2 and 7
表27：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝3和6
Table 27: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=3 and 6
表28：DMRS端口索引，dmrs-Type＝1，最大DMRS符号数为2，rank＝4和5

Table 28: DMRS port index, dmrs-Type=1, the maximum number of DMRS symbols is 2, rank=4 and 5

本申请实施例将存在对应关系的两个rank对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一张表格中，使第四指示信息(如天线端口字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，不会增加DMRS端口索引指示的比特开销，无需额外增加4张DMRS端口索引表格，不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。The embodiment of the present application encodes the DMRS port indexes corresponding to the two ranks that have a corresponding relationship in a table, so that the fourth indication information (such as the antenna port field) has at least one value indicating multiple DMRS port index groups. It will not increase the bit overhead of DMRS port index indication, there is no need to add four additional DMRS port index tables, it will not introduce additional indication information overhead, and it can reduce redundant indication bits.
可理解，虽然上述两个示例(表21到表28)均是以8天线端口，最大支持8层的上行传输为例，但本申请还可以适用于大于4层的其他传输层数的上行传输，比如最大6层的上行传输。6天线端口下第四指示信息的实现方式(即DMRS端口索引的指示方式)可以参考8天线端口时的实现方式，这里不一一赘述。6天线端口下可以将rank＝5～6与rank＝1～2建立一一对应的关系，rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应；或者，6天线端口下可以将rank＝5～6与rank＝3～4建立一一对应的关系，rank＝4与rank＝5对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应；6天线端口下如何指示DMRS端口索引，可以参考8天线端口下的指示方式，这里不一一详述。还可理解，下文为便于描述，以8天线端口为例进行说明。It can be understood that although the above two examples (Table 21 to Table 28) are based on 8 antenna ports and a maximum of 8 layers of uplink transmission, this application can also be applied to uplink transmission of other transmission layers greater than 4 layers. , such as uplink transmission of up to 6 layers. The implementation method of the fourth indication information under 6-antenna ports (that is, the indication method of DMRS port index) can be referred to the implementation method under 8-antenna ports, and will not be described in detail here. Under the 6-antenna port, a one-to-one correspondence can be established between rank=5~6 and rank=1~2. Rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, and rank=2 corresponds to rank=6. Alternatively, under the 6-antenna port, a one-to-one correspondence can be established between rank=5~6 and rank=1~2. Rank=5~6 and rank=3~4 establish a one-to-one correspondence, rank=4 corresponds to rank=5, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6; how to indicate the DMRS port index under the 6-antenna port, you can refer to the 8-antenna The instructions under the port will not be described in detail here. It can also be understood that, for convenience of description, 8 antenna ports are used as an example for description below.
可选的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第四指示信息和上述第三指示信息，确定网络设备指示的DMRS端口索引。示例性的，当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从上述多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第一DMRS端口索引组。当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示这两个码字都使能时，终端设备从上述多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第二DMRS端口索引组。Optionally, at the receiving end, the terminal device may combine the received fourth indication information and the above third indication information to determine the DMRS port index indicated by the network device. For example, when the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first DMRS port index group from the plurality of DMRS port index groups. When the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines a second DMRS port index group from the plurality of DMRS port index groups.
举例来说，以rank＝1与rank＝5对应，rank＝2与rank＝6对应，rank＝3与rank＝7对应，rank＝4与rank＝8对应为例。假设rank＝8，对应的DMRS端口索引表格为上述表24。假设第四指示信息的值为2，则指示的2个DMRS端口索引组分别是：2,3,6,7(即第一DMRS端口索引组)和0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7(即第二DMRS端口索引组)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能，则表示网络设备指示的DMRS端口索引是2,3,6,7(即第一DMRS端口索引组)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能，则表示网络设备指示的DMRS端口索引是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7(即第二DMRS端口索引组)。For example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=5, rank=2 corresponds to rank=6, rank=3 corresponds to rank=7, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=8. Assuming rank=8, the corresponding DMRS port index table is the above table 24. Assuming that the value of the fourth indication information is 2, the two indicated DMRS port index groups are: 2, 3, 6, 7 (i.e., the first DMRS port index group) and 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ,6,7 (that is, the second DMRS port index group). If the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, it means that the DMRS port index indicated by the network device is 2, 3, 6, and 7 (ie, the first DMRS port index group). If the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, it means that the DMRS port index indicated by the network device is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (ie, the second DMRS port index group).
本申请实施例复用现有4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格，并将rank＝1～4(称为低rank)和rank＝5～8(称为高rank)建立关联，使一个低rank对应的DMRS端口索引与一个高rank对应的DMRS端口索引编码在一个表格中，该表格中至少存在一个值，指示多个DMRS端口索引组(每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引)，从而无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，因此不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。此外，本申请实施例还通过一个指示信息指示网络设备为终端 设备分配的DMRS端口索引是这多个DMRS端口索引组中的哪个DMRS端口索引组，以使终端设备可以唯一确定网络设备为其分配的DMRS端口索引。因此，本申请实施例可以支持8天线端口的DMRS端口索引指示。The embodiment of the present application reuses the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1~4 of the existing 4 antenna ports, and establishes rank=1~4 (called low rank) and rank=5~8 (called high rank) Association, so that the DMRS port index corresponding to a low rank and the DMRS port index corresponding to a high rank are encoded in a table. There is at least one value in the table indicating multiple DMRS port index groups (each DMRS port index group includes at least (a DMRS port index), so there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, so no additional indication information overhead is introduced, and redundant indication bits can be reduced. In addition, the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal through an indication message. The DMRS port index assigned by the device is which DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups, so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the DMRS port index assigned to it by the network device. Therefore, this embodiment of the present application can support DMRS port index indication of 8 antenna ports.
一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还可以包括：网络设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合。其中，第一指示信息的一个值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的一个组合。也就是说，8天线端口的传输层数和TPMI索引的一个可选组合用一个值指示。In a possible implementation manner, the above information indication method may further include: the network device sends first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transmission layer number and the TPMI index. Wherein, a value of the first indication information indicates a combination of the transport layer number and the TPMI index. That is, an optional combination of the 8-antenna port's transport layer number and TPMI index is indicated by a single value.
另一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还包括：In another possible implementation, the above information indication method also includes:
S303，网络设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，该传输层数和该TPMI索引对应，第一指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，该多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；第一组合关联该多个DMRS端口索引组中的第一DMRS端口索引组，第二组合关联该多个DMRS端口索引组中的第二DMRS端口索引组。S303. The network device sends first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the transport layer number and the TPMI index. The transport layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information has at least a first value. The first value Indicates multiple combinations of transmission layer number and TPMI index, the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination; the first combination is associated with the first DMRS port index group in the multiple DMRS port index groups, and the second combination is associated with the The second DMRS port index group among the multiple DMRS port index groups.
相应的，终端设备接收该第一指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
可选的，本申请实施例中步骤S303的实现方式可以参考前述实施例一中步骤S101中相同或相应部分的实现方式，或者参考前述实施例二中步骤S201中相同或相应部分的实现方式，这里不赘述。Optionally, the implementation of step S303 in the embodiment of this application can refer to the implementation of the same or corresponding parts in step S101 in the previous embodiment 1, or the implementation of the same or corresponding parts in step S201 in the previous embodiment 2, I won’t go into details here.
可选的，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示两个码字(codeword)中的一个码字使能来指示上述多个组合中的第一组合。示例性的，网络设备将DCI中某一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值设置为26，且冗余版本字段的值设置为1，来表示该传输块对应的码字没有被使能。同理，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示上述多个组合中的第二组合。示例性的，DCI中任一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值不为26，或冗余版本字段的值不为1，表示2个传输块分别对应的码字都被使能。Optionally, the above-mentioned third indication information may indicate the first combination among the above-mentioned multiple combinations by indicating that one of the two codewords (codeword) is enabled. For example, the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled. Similarly, the above third indication information may indicate the second combination among the above multiple combinations by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, if the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transport block in the DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, it means that the codewords corresponding to the two transport blocks are both enabled.
S304，终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从该多个组合中确定一个组合。S304: The terminal device determines a combination from the multiple combinations according to the third indication information.
可选的，本申请实施例中步骤S304的实现方式可以参考前述实施例二中步骤S202的实现方式，这里不赘述。Optionally, the implementation of step S304 in the embodiment of this application may refer to the implementation of step S202 in the second embodiment, which will not be described again here.
本申请实施例将rank＝1～4(称为低rank)和rank＝5～8(称为高rank)建立关联，使一个低rank及其对应的TPMI索引与一个高rank及其对应的TPMI索引编码在一个表格中，并且低rank对应的TPMI索引不变，不仅可以支持8天线端口的传输层数(有1层到8层)和TPMI索引的组合指示，还可以在不影响兼容性的情况下，减少指示开销。此外，因为本申请实施例设计的8天线端口的rank和TPMI索引的可选组合表格中至少存在一个值指示多个组合的情况，所以本申请实施例还通过一个指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的是这多个组合中的哪个组合，以使终端设备可以唯一确定网络设备为其分配的传输层数和TPMI索引。The embodiment of the present application associates rank=1 to 4 (called low rank) and rank=5 to 8 (called high rank), so that a low rank and its corresponding TPMI index are linked to a high rank and its corresponding TPMI index. The index is encoded in a table, and the TPMI index corresponding to low rank remains unchanged. It not only supports the combined indication of the transmission layer number of the 8-antenna port (there are 1 to 8 layers) and the TPMI index, but also can be used without affecting compatibility. case, reducing instruction overhead. In addition, because there is at least one value indicating multiple combinations in the optional combination table of rank and TPMI index of the 8-antenna ports designed in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application also indicates that the network device is a terminal device through an indication information. Which of these multiple combinations is allocated so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the number of transport layers and TPMI index assigned to it by the network device.
实施例四Embodiment 4
本申请实施例四主要介绍如何支持大于4个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示，从而支持大于4层的非码本传输。Embodiment 4 of this application mainly introduces how to support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers.
参见图7，图7是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第四种流程示意图。该方法中所涉及的终端设备可具备大于4个发送天线，比如本申请中的终端设备具备6个发送天线或8个发送天线。如图7所示，该信息指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：Referring to Figure 7, Figure 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of an information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas. For example, the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas. As shown in Figure 7, the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S401，网络设备发送第五指示信息和第二指示信息，第五指示信息用于指示SRS资源索引，第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数。S401. The network device sends fifth indication information and second indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each of which The SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least a first set and a second set, When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number.
相应的，终端设备接收该第五指示信息和该第二指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the fifth indication information and the second indication information.
S402，终端设备根据该第二指示信息的值，从该多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。S402: The terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups according to the value of the second indication information.
可选的，上述第五指示信息和上述第二指示信息可以携带于一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第五指示信息和该第二指示信息可以携带于DCI信令中。举例来说，该第五指示信息可以是DCI信令中的SRS资源指示(SRI)字段，用于指示SRS资源索引；该第二指示信息可以是DCI信令中的天线端口字段，用于指示DMRS端口索引。Optionally, the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned second indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. For example, the fifth indication information and the second indication information may be carried in DCI signaling. For example, the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index; the second indication information may be the antenna port field in DCI signaling, used to indicate DMRS port index.
可选的，上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)的实现方式可以参考前述实施例一中的相关描述，这里不赘述。本申请实施例中不同rank(如rank＝1～8)对应的DMRS端口索引表格如前述表12a到表15b 所示或者如前述表17到表20所示，这里也不再赘述。Optionally, for the implementation method of the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), reference can be made to the relevant description in the foregoing Embodiment 1, which will not be described again here. In the embodiment of the present application, the DMRS port index tables corresponding to different ranks (such as rank=1~8) are as shown in the aforementioned tables 12a to 15b. or as shown in the aforementioned Table 17 to Table 20, which will not be described again here.
可选的，上述第五指示信息(如SRI字段)至少有一个值(为便于描述记为第一值)，这个值(即第一值)指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引。可理解，本申请实施例中的第一值与前述实施例一中的第一值相互独立，并不一定相同，也不一定不相同；仅是为便于描述而采用的表示方式。该多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，或者说该第一SRS资源索引组关联第一传输层数。该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数，或者说该第二SRS资源索引组关联第二传输层数。其中，第一传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，第二传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。举例来说，以8天线端口为例，当第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为5；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层数为3时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为8。或者，第一传输层数为1时，第二传输层数为8；当第一传输层数为2时，第二传输层数为7；当第一传输层数为3时，第二传输层数为6；当第一传输层数为4时，第二传输层数为5。当然，第一传输层数和第二传输层数还可以有其他对应关系，不局限于上述举例，本申请实施例不限制传输层数之间的对应关系。Optionally, the above-mentioned fifth indication information (such as the SRI field) has at least one value (recorded as the first value for ease of description). This value (i.e., the first value) indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, and each SRS resource index The group includes at least one SRS resource index. It can be understood that the first value in the embodiment of the present application is independent of each other and is not necessarily the same or different from the first value in the foregoing embodiment 1; they are merely expressions adopted for convenience of description. The plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the first transmission layer number, or in other words, the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the second transmission layer number, or in other words, the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number. Wherein, the first transmission layer number is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the second transmission layer number is one of 5, 6, 7, and 8. For example, taking 8 antenna ports as an example, when the first transmission layer number is 1, the second transmission layer number is 5; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 6. When the number of transmission layers is 3, the number of second transmission layers is 7; when the number of first transmission layers is 4, the number of second transmission layers is 8. Or, when the first transmission layer number is 1, the second transmission layer number is 8; when the first transmission layer number is 2, the second transmission layer number is 7; when the first transmission layer number is 3, the second transmission layer number is 3. The number of layers is 6; when the number of the first transmission layer is 4, the number of the second transmission layer is 5. Of course, the first transmission layer number and the second transmission layer number may also have other corresponding relationships, which are not limited to the above examples. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the corresponding relationship between the transmission layer numbers.
可理解，为了支持最大8层的非码本传输，需要对SRS资源索引的指示进行设计。下面举例说明本申请实施例中第五指示信息(如SRI字段)如何指示SRS资源索引。It is understandable that in order to support non-codebook transmission of a maximum of 8 layers, the indication of the SRS resource index needs to be designed. The following is an example of how the fifth indication information (such as the SRI field) indicates the SRS resource index in the embodiment of the present application.
举例来说，以rank＝1与rank＝8对应，rank＝2与rank＝7对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应，rank＝4与rank＝5对应为例。可理解，第一SRS资源索引组关联第一传输层数，第二SRS资源索引组关联第二传输层数，而本申请实施例将rank＝1～4与rank＝5～8建立关联，则该第一值指示的多个SRS资源索引组之间也存在关联。本申请实施例基于rank之间的对应关系，将存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组进行联合指示(比如用一个值指示存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组)，具体示例如下述表29所示。表29中各个参数及各个列的含义参考前述表10的相关描述，这里不赘述。由表29可知，第五指示信息(如SRI字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示多个SRS资源索引组。例如，NSRS＝8，SRI字段的值为0，则指示的2个SRS资源索引组分别是：0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7(即第二SRS资源索引组)和0(即第一SRS资源索引组)。For example, rank=1 corresponds to rank=8, rank=2 corresponds to rank=7, rank=3 corresponds to rank=6, and rank=4 corresponds to rank=5. It can be understood that the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number, and the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number. In the embodiment of the present application, rank=1~4 is associated with rank=5~8, then There is also an association between multiple SRS resource index groups indicated by the first value. Based on the correspondence between ranks, the embodiment of this application jointly indicates multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships (for example, using one value to indicate multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships). Specific examples are as shown in Table 29 below. shown. For the meanings of each parameter and each column in Table 29, refer to the relevant descriptions in Table 10 and will not be repeated here. It can be seen from Table 29 that the fifth indication information (such as the SRI field) has at least one value indicating multiple SRS resource index groups. For example, if N SRS = 8 and the value of the SRI field is 0, the two indicated SRS resource index groups are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (i.e., the second SRS resource index group) and 0 (i.e. the first SRS resource index group).
应理解，NSRS＝8时，rank＝1对应的SRS资源索引组是0到7这8个SRS资源索引中选1个SRS资源索引的组合，即rank＝1对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 1＝8个。同理，NSRS＝8时，rank＝2对应的SRS资源索引组是0到7这8个SRS资源索引中选2个SRS资源索引的组合，即rank＝2对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 2＝(8*7)/(2*1)＝28个。NSRS＝8时，rank＝3对应的SRS资源索引组是0到7这8个SRS资源索引中选3个SRS资源索引的组合，共有C8 3＝(8*7*6)/(3*2*1)＝56个。NSRS＝8时，rank＝4对应的SRS资源索引组是0到7这8个SRS资源索引中选4个SRS资源索引的组合，共有C8 4＝(8*7*6*5)/(4*3*2*1)＝70个。以此类推，NSRS＝8时，rank＝5对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 5个，rank＝6对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 6个，rank＝7对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 7个，rank＝8对应的SRS资源索引组共有C8 8个。由此可知，当NSRS＝8时，rank值越大，其对应的SRS资源索引组越多。本申请实施例为节省篇幅，下述表29仅示出了SRI字段的部分值及这部分值分别指示的SRS资源索引组。实际应用中，下述表29可以包括NSRS＝8时，rank＝1～8对应的所有SRS资源索引组。It should be understood that when N SRS =8, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank=1 is a combination of 1 SRS resource index selected from the 8 SRS resource indexes 0 to 7, that is, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank=1 has a total of C 8 1 = 8. Similarly, when N SRS = 8, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank = 2 is a combination of 2 SRS resource indexes selected from the 8 SRS resource indexes 0 to 7, that is, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank = 2 has a total of C 8 2 = (8*7)/(2*1) = 28. When N SRS = 8, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank = 3 is a combination of 3 SRS resource indexes selected from the 8 SRS resource indexes from 0 to 7, with a total of C 8 3 = (8*7*6)/(3* 2*1)=56. When N SRS = 8, the SRS resource index group corresponding to rank = 4 is a combination of 4 SRS resource indexes selected from the 8 SRS resource indexes 0 to 7, with a total of C 8 4 = (8*7*6*5)/( 4*3*2*1)=70. By analogy, when N SRS =8, there are C 8 5 SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank = 5, C 8 6 SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank = 6, and C 8 6 SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank = 7. There are C 8 7 , and there are C 8 8 SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank=8. It can be seen that when N SRS =8, the larger the rank value, the more SRS resource index groups it corresponds to. In order to save space in the embodiment of this application, the following Table 29 only shows part of the values of the SRI field and the SRS resource index groups indicated by these parts of the values. In practical applications, the following Table 29 may include all SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank=1 to 8 when N SRS =8.
表29：SRI字段示例2




Table 29: SRI field example 2




因为NSRS＝8时，rank＝1～8对应的SRS资源索引组的总个数(等于C8 1+C8 2+C8 3+C8 4+C8 5+C8 6+C8 7+C8 8)非常多，所以本申请实施例通过建立rank＝1～4与rank＝5～8的对应关系，基于该对应关系，使第五指示信息(如SRI字段)至少存在一个值，该值指示多个SRS资源索引组，相比于一个值指示一个SRS资源索引组的方式，减少了指示开销。Because when N SRS = 8, the total number of SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank = 1 to 8 (equal to C 8 1 +C 8 2 +C 8 3 +C 8 4 +C 8 5 +C 8 6 +C 8 7 +C 8 8 ) are very many, so the embodiment of the present application establishes the corresponding relationship between rank=1~4 and rank=5~8, and based on the corresponding relationship, the fifth indication information (such as SRI field) has at least one value. , this value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups. Compared with one value indicating one SRS resource index group, the indication overhead is reduced.
可理解，虽然上述示例(表29)是以8天线端口，最大支持8层的上行传输为例，但本申请还可以适用于大于4层的其他传输层数的上行传输，比如最大6层的上行传输。6天线端口下第五指示信息的实现方式(即SRS资源索引的指示方式)可以参考8天线端口时的实现方式，这里不一一赘述。6天线端口下可以将rank＝5～6与rank＝3～4建立一一对应的关系，rank＝4与rank＝5对应，rank＝3与rank＝6对应；6天线端口下如何指示SRS资源索引，可以参考8天线端口下的指示方式，这里不一一详述。还可理解，下文为便于描述，以8天线端口为例进行说明。It can be understood that although the above example (Table 29) takes 8 antenna ports and supports a maximum of 8 layers of uplink transmission as an example, this application can also be applied to uplink transmission of other transmission layers greater than 4 layers, such as a maximum of 6 layers. Uplink transmission. The implementation method of the fifth indication information under 6-antenna ports (ie, the indication method of SRS resource index) can be referred to the implementation method under 8-antenna ports, and will not be described in detail here. Under the 6-antenna port, a one-to-one correspondence can be established between rank=5~6 and rank=3~4. Rank=4 corresponds to rank=5, and rank=3 corresponds to rank=6. How to indicate SRS resources under the 6-antenna port? For index, you can refer to the indication method under the 8-antenna port, which will not be described in detail here. It can also be understood that, for convenience of description, 8 antenna ports are used as an example for description below.
在一些场景中，为了进一步减少指示开销，本申请实施例也可以选取每个rank对应的SRS资源索引组中的部分SRS资源索引组进行指示。也就是说，上述表29可以仅包括NSRS＝8时，rank＝1～8对应的所有SRS资源索引组中的部分。In some scenarios, in order to further reduce indication overhead, embodiments of the present application may also select part of the SRS resource index groups corresponding to each rank for indication. That is to say, the above table 29 may only include part of all SRS resource index groups corresponding to rank=1 to 8 when N SRS =8.
可选的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第五指示信息(如SRI字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)，确定网络设备指示SRS资源索引和DMRS端口索引。具体的，终端设备接收到上述第五指示信息(如SRI字段)和上述第二指示信息(如天线端口字段)后，可以根据上述多个SRS资源索引组分别包含的SRS资源索引的个数以及上述第二指示信息的值，确定该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引有哪些，再可以根据该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数，从上述多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。示例性的，如果该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数，与上述多个SRS资源索引组中第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数相同；则终端设备确定第一SRS 资源索引组，该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的SRS资源索引。如果该第二指示信息指示的DMRS端口索引的个数，与上述多个SRS资源索引组中第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数相同；则终端设备确定第二SRS资源索引组，该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的SRS资源索引。Optionally, at the receiving end, the terminal device may combine the received fifth indication information (eg, SRI field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (eg, antenna port field) to determine the network device indication SRS resource index and DMRS port index. Specifically, after receiving the above-mentioned fifth indication information (such as the SRI field) and the above-mentioned second indication information (such as the antenna port field), the terminal device can determine the number of SRS resource indexes contained in the above-mentioned multiple SRS resource index groups and The value of the above-mentioned second indication information determines which DMRS port indexes are indicated by the second indication information. Then, one can be determined from the above-mentioned plurality of SRS resource index groups according to the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information. SRS resource index group. For example, if the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups; then the terminal device determines the first SRS Resource index group, the SRS resource index included in the first SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device. If the number of DMRS port indexes indicated by the second indication information is the same as the number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups; then the terminal device determines the second SRS resource index group , the SRS resource index included in the second SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
举例来说，以上述表29为例，假设NSRS＝8，第五指示信息的值为0，则指示的SRS资源索引组分别是：0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7(即第二SRS资源索引组)和0(即第一SRS资源索引组)。终端设备基于第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组分别包含的SRS资源索引的个数，可以确定网络设备指示的rank为1或者rank为5，以双符号Type 1 DMRS为例，对应的DMRS端口索引表格为前述表12a。若第二指示信息的值为0到13中的一个值，例如0，则表示网络设备指示的是rank＝1，对应的SRS资源索引为0，即可以确定第一SRS资源索引组。若第二指示信息的值为14，则表示网络设备指示的是rank＝5，对应的SRS资源索引为0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7，即可以确定第二SRS资源索引组。For example, taking the above Table 29 as an example, assuming N SRS =8 and the value of the fifth indication information is 0, the indicated SRS resource index groups are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (i.e., the second SRS resource index group) and 0 (i.e., the first SRS resource index group). Based on the number of SRS resource indexes contained in the first SRS resource index group and the second SRS resource index group, the terminal device can determine that the rank indicated by the network device is 1 or 5. Taking dual-symbol Type 1 DMRS as an example, the corresponding The DMRS port index table is the aforementioned table 12a. If the value of the second indication information is a value from 0 to 13, such as 0, it means that the network device indicates rank=1 and the corresponding SRS resource index is 0, and the first SRS resource index group can be determined. If the value of the second indication information is 14, it means that the network device indicates rank=5, and the corresponding SRS resource index is 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7, and the second SRS resource can be determined Index group.
本申请实施例将低rank(如rank＝1～4)与高rank(如rank＝5～8)建立关联，使一个低rank对应的SRS资源索引组与一个高rank对应的SRS资源索引组也相互关联，并将存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组进行联合指示，比如用一个值指示存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组；可以支持大于4个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示，从而支持大于4层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能。此外，本申请实施例还通过复用现有4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格，并基于建立的rank对应关系利用该4天线端口的rank＝1～4对应的DMRS端口索引表格中的冗余位(或预留值)指示rank＝5～8对应的DMTS端口索引，从而无需额外增加DMRS端口索引表格，因此不会引入额外的指示信息开销，并可以减少冗余指示位。The embodiment of the present application associates low ranks (such as rank=1~4) with high ranks (such as rank=5~8), so that an SRS resource index group corresponding to a low rank and an SRS resource index group corresponding to a high rank are also Correlate with each other, and jointly indicate multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships, such as using one value to indicate multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships; it can support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting More than 4 layers of non-codebook transmission, thereby improving transmission performance. In addition, the embodiment of the present application also reuses the DMRS port index table corresponding to rank=1~4 of the existing 4-antenna ports, and uses the DMRS ports corresponding to rank=1~4 of the 4-antenna ports based on the established rank correspondence. The redundant bits (or reserved values) in the index table indicate the DMTS port index corresponding to rank=5~8, so there is no need to add an additional DMRS port index table, so no additional indication information overhead is introduced, and redundant indications can be reduced Bit.
实施例五Embodiment 5
本申请实施例五主要介绍支持大于4个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示的另一种方式，从而支持大于4层的非码本传输。Embodiment 5 of this application mainly introduces another way to support SRS resource index indication of more than 4 SRS resources, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of more than 4 layers.
参见图8，图8是本申请实施例提供的信息指示方法的第五种流程示意图。该方法中所涉及的终端设备可具备大于4个发送天线，比如本申请中的终端设备具备6个发送天线或8个发送天线。如图8所示，该信息指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：Referring to Figure 8, Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of the fifth information indication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal equipment involved in this method may have more than 4 transmitting antennas. For example, the terminal equipment in this application has 6 transmitting antennas or 8 transmitting antennas. As shown in Figure 8, the information indication method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S501，网络设备发送第五指示信息和第三指示信息，第五指示信息用于指示SRS资源索引，第五指示信息至少有第一值，该第一值指示多个SRS资源索引组，每个SRS资源索引组包括至少一个SRS资源索引；第三指示信息指示该多个SRS资源索引组中的一个SRS资源索引组。S501. The network device sends fifth indication information and third indication information. The fifth indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource index. The fifth indication information has at least a first value. The first value indicates multiple SRS resource index groups, each of which The SRS resource index group includes at least one SRS resource index; the third indication information indicates one SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups.
相应的，终端设备接收该第五指示信息和该第三指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the fifth indication information and the third indication information.
S502，终端设备根据该第三指示信息，从该多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。S502: The terminal device determines an SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups according to the third indication information.
可选的，上述第五指示信息和上述第三指示信息可以携带于一个信令中发送，也可以携带于不同信令中发送，本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，该第五指示信息和该第三指示信息可以携带于下行控制信息(DCI)信令中。举例来说，该第五指示信息可以是DCI信令中的SRS资源指示(SRI)字段，用于指示SRS资源索引；该第三指示信息可以是DCI信令中的MCS字段、冗余版本(redundancy version)字段以及新数据指示(new data indicator)字段中的一项或多项，比如该第三指示信息是MCS字段和冗余版本字段。具体MCS字段和冗余版本字段联合指示码字未被使能(disabled)的方式参考前述实施例二的相关描述，这里不赘述。Optionally, the above-mentioned fifth indication information and the above-mentioned third indication information may be carried in one signaling and sent, or may be carried in different signalings and sent, which is not limited by the embodiment of this application. For example, the fifth indication information and the third indication information may be carried in downlink control information (DCI) signaling. For example, the fifth indication information may be the SRS Resource Indication (SRI) field in DCI signaling, used to indicate the SRS resource index; the third indication information may be the MCS field, redundancy version ( redundancy version) field and one or more of the new data indicator (new data indicator) fields. For example, the third indication information is the MCS field and the redundancy version field. For a specific method of jointly indicating that the codeword is disabled (disabled) by the MCS field and the redundancy version field, refer to the relevant description of the foregoing Embodiment 2, which will not be described again here.
其中，该第五指示信息(如SRI字段)的实现方式可以参考前述实施例四中的相关描述，这里不赘述。本申请实施例中SRI字段的值及其指示的SRS资源索引如前述表29所示，这里也不赘述。该第三指示信息的实现方式可以参考前述实施例二中的相关描述，这里不赘述。For the implementation of the fifth indication information (such as the SRI field), reference can be made to the relevant description in the foregoing Embodiment 4, which will not be described again here. In this embodiment of the present application, the value of the SRI field and its indicated SRS resource index are as shown in the aforementioned Table 29, which will not be described again here. For the implementation of the third indication information, reference can be made to the relevant description in the foregoing second embodiment, which will not be described again here.
可选的，上述第一值指示的多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第一传输层数，或者说该第一SRS资源索引组关联第一传输层数。该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引的个数等于第二传输层数，或者说该第二SRS资源索引组关联第二传输层数。上述第三指示信息可以通过指示两个码字中的一个码字使能来指示上述多个SRS资源索引组中的第一SRS资源索引组。示例性的，网络设备将DCI中某一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值设置为26，且冗余版本字段的值设置为1，来表示该传输块对应的码字没有被使能。同理，上述第三指示信息可以通过指示该两个码字都使能来指示上述多个SRS资源索引组中的第二SRS资源索引组。示例性的，DCI中任一个传输块对应的MCS字段的值不为26，或冗余版本字段的值不为1，表示2个传输块分别对应的码字都被使能。 Optionally, the plurality of SRS resource index groups indicated by the first value include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the first SRS resource index group is equal to the first transmission layer number, or in other words, the first SRS resource index group is associated with the first transmission layer number. The number of SRS resource indexes included in the second SRS resource index group is equal to the second transmission layer number, or in other words, the second SRS resource index group is associated with the second transmission layer number. The third indication information may indicate the first SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that one of the two codewords is enabled. For example, the network device sets the value of the MCS field corresponding to a certain transport block in the DCI to 26, and sets the value of the redundancy version field to 1, to indicate that the codeword corresponding to the transport block is not enabled. Similarly, the third indication information may indicate the second SRS resource index group among the plurality of SRS resource index groups by indicating that both codewords are enabled. For example, if the value of the MCS field corresponding to any transport block in the DCI is not 26, or the value of the redundancy version field is not 1, it means that the codewords corresponding to the two transport blocks are both enabled.
可选的，在接收端，终端设备可以联合接收到的上述第五指示信息和上述第三指示信息，确定网络设备指示的SRS资源索引。示例性的，当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，终端设备从上述多个SRS资源索引组中确定第一SRS资源索引组，该第一SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的SRS资源索引。当终端设备接收到的上述第三指示信息指示这两个码字都使能时，终端设备从上述多个SRS资源索引组中确定第二SRS资源索引组，该第二SRS资源索引组包含的SRS资源索引即为网络设备给终端设备配置的SRS资源索引。Optionally, at the receiving end, the terminal device may combine the received fifth indication information and the above third indication information to determine the SRS resource index indicated by the network device. Exemplarily, when the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines the first SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups. The SRS resource index included in an SRS resource index group is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device. When the third indication information received by the terminal device indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines a second SRS resource index group from the plurality of SRS resource index groups. The second SRS resource index group contains The SRS resource index is the SRS resource index configured by the network device for the terminal device.
举例来说，以前述表29为例，假设NSRS＝8，第五指示信息的值为8，则指示的SRS资源索引组分别是：0,1,2,3,4,5,6(即第二SRS资源索引组)和0,1(即第一SRS资源索引组)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能，则终端设备确定网络设备指示的SRS资源索引是0,1(即第一SRS资源索引组)。若第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能，则终端设备确定网络设备指示的SRS资源索引是0,1,2,3,4,5,6(即第二SRS资源索引组)。For example, taking the aforementioned Table 29 as an example, assuming N SRS =8 and the value of the fifth indication information is 8, the indicated SRS resource index groups are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ( That is, the second SRS resource index group) and 0,1 (that is, the first SRS resource index group). If the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, the terminal device determines that the SRS resource index indicated by the network device is 0,1 (ie, the first SRS resource index group). If the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the terminal device determines that the SRS resource index indicated by the network device is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (ie, the second SRS resource index group).
一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还包括：In a possible implementation, the above information indication method also includes:
S503，网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，该多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当第二指示信息为第一集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第一传输层数，当第二指示信息为第二集合中的值时，DMRS端口索引关联第二传输层数。S503. The network device sends second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets. The multiple sets include at least the first set and the second set. When When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first transmission layer number. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second transmission layer number.
相应的，终端设备接收该第二指示信息，并确定DMRS端口索引。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second indication information and determines the DMRS port index.
可选的，本申请实施例中步骤S504的实现方式可以参考前述实施例四中步骤S401中相同或相应部分的实现方式，这里不再赘述。Optionally, the implementation of step S504 in this embodiment of the present application may refer to the implementation of the same or corresponding parts of step S401 in the fourth embodiment, which will not be described again here.
另一种可能的实现方式中，上述信息指示方法还包括：网络设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引，该第四指示信息至少有第二值，该第二值指示多个DMRS端口索引组，每个DMRS端口索引组包括至少一个DMRS端口索引。相应的，终端设备接收该第四指示信息。终端设备根据上述第三指示信息，从该多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。In another possible implementation, the above information indication method further includes: the network device sends fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index, the fourth indication information has at least a second value, and the second The value indicates multiple DMRS port index groups, each DMRS port index group including at least one DMRS port index. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the fourth indication information. The terminal device determines a DMRS port index group from the multiple DMRS port index groups according to the above third indication information.
本申请实施例将rank＝1～4(称为低rank)与rank＝5～8(称为高rank)建立关联，使一个低rank对应的SRS资源索引组与一个高rank对应的SRS资源索引组也相互关联，并将存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组进行联合指示，比如用一个值指示存在关联关系的多个SRS资源索引组；本申请实施例还通过一个指示信息指示网络设备为终端设备分配的SRS资源索引是这多个SRS资源索引组中的哪个SRS资源索引组，以使终端设备可以唯一确定网络设备为其分配的SRS资源索引；可以支持最大8个SRS资源的SRS资源索引指示，从而支持最大8层的非码本传输，进而提高传输性能。The embodiment of the present application associates rank=1~4 (called low rank) with rank=5~8 (called high rank), so that an SRS resource index group corresponding to a low rank and an SRS resource index corresponding to a high rank are Groups are also associated with each other, and multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships are jointly indicated, for example, one value is used to indicate multiple SRS resource index groups with associated relationships; the embodiment of the present application also indicates the network device through an indication information. Which SRS resource index group among the multiple SRS resource index groups is the SRS resource index allocated by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can uniquely determine the SRS resource index allocated by the network device; it can support SRS resources of up to 8 SRS resources. Index indication, thereby supporting non-codebook transmission of up to 8 layers, thereby improving transmission performance.
随着天线技术和信号处理技术的不断演进，未来需要支持大于4个发送天线的上行传输。一个可选实施例中，针对上述基于码本(codebook based)的上行传输，本申请实施例还提供8发送天线对应的预编码矩阵集合(码本)。举例来说，8天线对应的预编码矩阵集合(码本)可以如下述表30到表37所示。可理解，确定了TPMI索引即确定了唯一的预编码矩阵。应理解，表30到表37仅是示例，本申请实施例不限制预编码矩阵的具体内容。With the continuous evolution of antenna technology and signal processing technology, uplink transmission of more than four transmit antennas will need to be supported in the future. In an optional embodiment, for the above codebook-based uplink transmission, the embodiment of the present application also provides a precoding matrix set (codebook) corresponding to 8 transmitting antennas. For example, the precoding matrix set (codebook) corresponding to 8 antennas can be shown in Table 30 to Table 37 below. It can be understood that determining the TPMI index determines the unique precoding matrix. It should be understood that Table 30 to Table 37 are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific content of the precoding matrix.
表30：8天线端口，单层(即rank＝1)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合


Table 30: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, single-layer (i.e. rank=1) transmission


上述表30中TPMI索引为56到63分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：

The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 56 to 63 in the above Table 30 are as follows:

上述表30中TPMI索引为64到71分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：

The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 64 to 71 in the above Table 30 are as follows:

表31：8天线端口，2层(即rank＝2)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合



Table 31: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 2-layer (i.e. rank=2) transmission



上述表31中TPMI索引为70到75分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：

The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 70 to 75 in the above Table 31 are as follows:

表32：8天线端口，3层(即rank＝3)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合


Table 32: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 3-layer (i.e. rank=3) transmission


上述表32中TPMI索引为48到55分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：



The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 48 to 55 in the above Table 32 are as follows:



表33：8天线端口，4层(即rank＝4)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合


Table 33: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 4-layer (i.e. rank=4) transmission


上述表33中TPMI索引为29、31、33、35、37、39、41以及43分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：







The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 41 and 43 in Table 33 above are as follows:







表34：8天线端口，5层(即rank＝5)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合

Table 34: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 5-layer (i.e. rank=5) transmission

表35：8天线端口，6层(即rank＝6)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合

Table 35: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 6-layer (i.e. rank=6) transmission

表36：8天线端口，7层(即rank＝7)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合
Table 36: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 7-layer (i.e. rank=7) transmission
上述表36中TPMI索引为4到6分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：
The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 4 to 6 in Table 36 above are as follows:
表37：8天线端口，8层(即rank＝8)传输对应的预编码矩阵集合
Table 37: Precoding matrix set corresponding to 8-antenna port, 8-layer (i.e. rank=8) transmission
上述表37中TPMI索引为3和4分别标识的预编码矩阵如下：
The precoding matrices identified by TPMI indexes 3 and 4 in Table 37 above are as follows:
可理解，受限于终端设备的体积和成本，不同终端设备的天线架构和能力具有差异。对于不同终端设备的发送天线能力，可使用的预编码矩阵不相同。换句话说，对于不同的天线能力，TPMI索引的取值范围不同。示例性的，1)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均不支持相干传输(Non Coherent)，则该终端设备可使用表30中TPMI index＝0～7、表31中TPMI index＝0～27、表32中TPMI index＝0～15、表33中TPMI index＝0～11、表34中TPMI index＝0～3、表35中TPMI index＝0～1、表36中TPMI index＝0、以及表37中TPMI index＝0所标识的预编码矩阵。2)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线支持部分相干传输(Partial Coherent)，则该终端设备可使用表30中TPMI index＝8～39、表31中TPMI index＝28～59、表32中TPMI index＝16～39、表33中TPMI index＝12～27、表34中TPMI index＝4～11、表35中TPMI index＝2～5、表36中TPMI index＝1～2、以及表37中TPMI index＝1～2所标识的预编码矩阵。3)当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均支持相干传输(Full Coherent)，则该终端设备可使用表30中TPMI index＝40～71、表31中TPMI index＝60～75、表32中TPMI index＝40～55、表33中TPMI index＝28～43、表34中TPMI index＝12～19、表35中TPMI index＝6～13、表36中TPMI index＝3～6、以及表37中TPMI index＝3～4所标识的预编码矩阵。可理解，当终端设备(或UE)的天线能力为所有发送天线均支持相干传输(Full Coherent)时，由于终端设备的天线能力较强，所以终端设备可使用上述表30到表37中的任意预编码矩阵。It is understandable that due to the size and cost of the terminal equipment, the antenna architecture and capabilities of different terminal equipment are different. For the transmit antenna capabilities of different terminal devices, the precoding matrices that can be used are different. In other words, for different antenna capabilities, the value range of the TPMI index is different. For example, 1) When the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmit antennas do not support coherent transmission (Non Coherent), the terminal device can use TPMI index=0~7 in Table 30 and TPMI in Table 31 index=0~27, TPMI index=0~15 in Table 32, TPMI index=0~11 in Table 33, TPMI index=0~3 in Table 34, TPMI index=0~1 in Table 35, TPMI in Table 36 index=0, and the precoding matrix identified by TPMI index=0 in Table 37. 2) When the antenna capability of the terminal equipment (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas support partial coherent transmission (Partial Coherent), the terminal equipment can use TPMI index=8~39 in Table 30 and TPMI index=28~59 in Table 31 , TPMI index in Table 32=16~39, TPMI index in Table 33=12~27, TPMI index in Table 34=4~11, TPMI index in Table 35=2~5, TPMI index in Table 36=1~2 , and the precoding matrix identified by TPMI index=1~2 in Table 37. 3) When the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmit antennas support coherent transmission (Full Coherent), the terminal device can use TPMI index=40~71 in Table 30 and TPMI index=60~75 in Table 31 , TPMI index in Table 32=40~55, TPMI index in Table 33=28~43, TPMI index in Table 34=12~19, TPMI index in Table 35=6~13, TPMI index in Table 36=3~6 , and the precoding matrix identified by TPMI index=3~4 in Table 37. It can be understood that when the antenna capability of the terminal device (or UE) is that all transmitting antennas support coherent transmission (Full Coherent), the terminal device can use any of the above Table 30 to Table 37 because the antenna capability of the terminal device is strong. precoding matrix.
上述内容详细阐述了本申请提供的方法，为了便于实施本申请实施例的上述方案，本申请实施例还提供了相应的装置或设备。The above content elaborates the method provided by the present application in detail. In order to facilitate the implementation of the above solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the embodiments of the present application also provide corresponding devices or equipment.
本申请根据上述方法实施例对网络设备和终端设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面将结合图9至图11详细描述本申请实施例的网络设备和终端设备。This application divides the network equipment and the terminal equipment into functional modules according to the above method embodiments. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in this application is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. The network equipment and terminal equipment of the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 9 to 11.
参见图9，图9是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一结构示意图，如图9所示，该通信装置包括收发单元10和处理单元20。Referring to Figure 9, Figure 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 9, the communication device includes a transceiver unit 10 and a processing unit 20.
在本申请的一些实施例中，该通信装置可以是上文示出的网络设备。即图9所示的通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的步骤或功能等。示例性的，该通信装置可以是网络设备或芯片等，本申请实施例对此不作限定。In some embodiments of the present application, the communication device may be the network device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 9 can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment. For example, the communication device may be a network device or a chip, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
一种设计中，收发单元10，用于发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息。In one design, the transceiver unit 10 is used to send first indication information and second indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第一指示信息和第二指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第一指示信息和该第二指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the first indication information and the second indication information, and to send the first indication information and the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
可理解，关于第一指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图4)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 4), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
另一种设计中，收发单元10，用于发送第一指示信息和第三指示信息。In another design, the transceiver unit 10 is used to send the first indication information and the third indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第一指示信息和第三指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第一指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the first indication information and the third indication information, and to send the first indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于发送第二指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send second indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第二指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第二指示信息。 Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate second indication information, and send the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
可理解，关于第一指示信息、第二指示信息以及第三指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the second indication information, the third indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图5)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 5), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于发送第四指示信息和第三指示信息。In yet another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to send fourth indication information and third indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第四指示信息和第三指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第四指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate fourth indication information and third indication information, and to send the fourth indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于发送第一指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send the first indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第一指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第一指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate first indication information, and send the first indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
可理解，关于第一指示信息、第三指示信息以及第四指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the third indication information, the fourth indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图6)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 6), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
再又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于发送第五指示信息和第二指示信息。In yet another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to send the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第五指示信息和第二指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第五指示信息和该第二指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the fifth indication information and the second indication information, and to send the fifth indication information and the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
可理解，关于第五指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图7)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 7), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
再又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于发送第五指示信息和第三指示信息。In yet another design, the transceiver unit 10 is used to send the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第五指示信息和第三指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第五指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate the fifth indication information and the third indication information, and to send the fifth indication information and the third indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于发送第二指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to send second indication information.
示例性的，处理单元20，用于生成第二指示信息，以及通过或控制收发单元10发送该第二指示信息。Exemplarily, the processing unit 20 is configured to generate second indication information, and send the second indication information through or control the transceiver unit 10 .
可理解，关于第五指示信息、第三指示信息以及第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the third indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图8)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 8), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
复用图9，在本申请的另一些实施例中，该通信装置可以是上文示出的终端设备。即图9所示的通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的步骤或功能等。示例性的，该通信装置可以是终端设备或芯片等，本申请实施例对此不作限定。Reusing Figure 9, in other embodiments of the present application, the communication device may be the terminal device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 9 can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment. For example, the communication device may be a terminal device or a chip, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
一种设计中，收发单元10，用于接收第一指示信息和第二指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个组合中确定一个组合。In one design, the transceiver unit 10 is used to receive the first indication information and the second indication information; the processing unit 20 is used to determine a combination from multiple combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
可理解，关于第一指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图4)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 4), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
另一种设计中，收发单元10，用于接收第一指示信息和第三指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个组合中确定一个组合。In another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the first indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a combination from multiple combinations based on the third indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合。处理单元20，具体用于：当第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，从多个组合中确定第一组合；当第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能时，从多个组合中确定第二组合。In a possible implementation, the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination. The processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first combination from multiple combinations; when the third indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled When , a second combination is determined from multiple combinations.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于接收第二指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the second indication information.
可理解，关于第一指示信息、第二指示信息以及第三指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the second indication information, the third indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图5)，这里不再详述。 It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 5), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于接收第四指示信息和第三指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。In another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fourth indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups based on the third indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个DMRS端口索引组包括第一DMRS端口索引组和第二DMRS端口索引组。处理单元20，具体用于：当第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，从多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第一DMRS端口索引组；当第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能时，从多个DMRS端口索引组中确定第二DMRS端口索引组。In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of DMRS port index groups include a first DMRS port index group and a second DMRS port index group. The processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups; when the third indication information indicates that both When each codeword is enabled, the second DMRS port index group is determined from multiple DMRS port index groups.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于接收第一指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个组合中确定一个组合。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the first indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine a combination from multiple combinations based on the third indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元20，还具体用于：当第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，从多个组合中确定第一组合；当第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能时，从多个组合中确定第二组合。In a possible implementation, the processing unit 20 is also specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first combination from multiple combinations; when the third When the indication information indicates that both codewords are enabled, the second combination is determined from multiple combinations.
可理解，关于第一指示信息、第三指示信息以及第四指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the third indication information, the fourth indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图6)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 6), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
再又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于接收第五指示信息和第二指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。In yet another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fifth indication information and the second indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine an SRS resource from multiple SRS resource index groups according to the value of the second indication information. Index group.
可理解，关于第五指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图7)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 7), which are not included here. Elaborate further.
再又一种设计中，收发单元10，用于接收第五指示信息和第三指示信息；处理单元20，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。In yet another design, the transceiver unit 10 is configured to receive the fifth indication information and the third indication information; the processing unit 20 is configured to determine an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups based on the third indication information. .
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述多个SRS资源索引组包括第一SRS资源索引组和第二SRS资源索引组。处理单元20，具体用于：当第三指示信息指示两个码字中的一个码字使能时，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定第一SRS资源索引组；当第三指示信息指示两个码字都使能时，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定第二SRS资源索引组。In a possible implementation manner, the plurality of SRS resource index groups include a first SRS resource index group and a second SRS resource index group. The processing unit 20 is specifically configured to: when the third indication information indicates that one of the two codewords is enabled, determine the first SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups; when the third indication information indicates that both When all codewords are enabled, the second SRS resource index group is determined from multiple SRS resource index groups.
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元10，还用于接收第二指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 10 is also configured to receive the second indication information.
可理解，关于第五指示信息、第三指示信息以及第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the third indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例，对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等，可以参考上述方法实施例(如图8)，这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments (as shown in Figure 8), which are not discussed here. Elaborate further.
以上介绍了本申请实施例的网络设备和终端设备，以下介绍网络设备和终端设备可能的产品形态。应理解，但凡具备上述图9所述的网络设备的功能的任何形态的产品，或者，但凡具备上述图9所述的终端设备的功能的任何形态的产品，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。还应理解，以下介绍仅为举例，不限制本申请实施例的网络设备和终端设备的产品形态仅限于此。The above describes the network equipment and terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application. The following describes possible product forms of the network equipment and terminal equipment. It should be understood that any form of product that has the function of the network device described in Figure 9 above, or any form of product that has the function of the terminal device described in Figure 9 above, falls within the protection of the embodiments of this application. scope. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and does not limit the product forms of the network equipment and terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application to this.
在一种可能的实现方式中，图9所示的通信装置中，处理单元20可以是一个或多个处理器，收发单元10可以是收发器，或者收发单元10还可以是发送单元和接收单元，发送单元可以是发送器，接收单元可以是接收器，该发送单元和接收单元集成于一个器件，例如收发器。本申请实施例中，处理器和收发器可以被耦合等，对于处理器和收发器的连接方式，本申请实施例不作限定。在执行上述方法的过程中，上述方法中有关发送信息(如发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息、第三指示信息、第四指示信息、第五指示信息等)的过程，可以理解为由处理器输出上述信息的过程。在输出上述信息时，处理器将该上述信息输出给收发器，以便由收发器进行发射。该上述信息在由处理器输出之后，还可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才到达收发器。类似的，上述方法中有关接收信息(如接收第一指示信息、第二指示信息、第三指示信息、第四指示信息、第五指示信息等)的过程，可以理解为处理器接收输入的上述信息的过程。处理器接收输入的信息时，收发器接收该上述信息，并将其输入处理器。更进一步的，在收发器收到该上述信息之后，该上述信息可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才输入处理器。In a possible implementation, in the communication device shown in FIG. 9 , the processing unit 20 may be one or more processors, and the transceiver unit 10 may be a transceiver, or the transceiver unit 10 may also be a sending unit and a receiving unit. , the sending unit may be a transmitter, and the receiving unit may be a receiver, and the sending unit and the receiving unit are integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. In the embodiment of the present application, the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection method between the processor and the transceiver. During the execution of the above method, the process of sending information (such as sending first instruction information, second instruction information, third instruction information, fourth instruction information, fifth instruction information, etc.) in the above method can be understood as The process by which the processor outputs the above information. When outputting the above information, the processor outputs the above information to the transceiver for transmission by the transceiver. After the above information is output by the processor, it may also need to undergo other processing before reaching the transceiver. Similarly, the process of receiving information (such as receiving first instruction information, second instruction information, third instruction information, fourth instruction information, fifth instruction information, etc.) in the above method can be understood as the processor receiving the input of the above-mentioned information process. When the processor receives the incoming information, the transceiver receives the above information and inputs it into the processor. Furthermore, after the transceiver receives the above information, the above information may need to undergo other processing before being input to the processor.
参见图10，图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的结构示意图。该通信装置1000可以为网络设备或终端设备，或其中的芯片。图10仅示出了通信装置1000的主要部件。除处理器1001和收发器1002 之外，所述通信装置还可以进一步包括存储器1003、以及输入输出装置(图未示意)。Referring to Figure 10, Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1000 may be a network device or a terminal device, or a chip therein. Figure 10 shows only the main components of the communication device 1000. Except processor 1001 and transceiver 1002 In addition, the communication device may further include a memory 1003 and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
处理器1001主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对整个通信装置进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。存储器1003主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器1002可以包括控制电路和天线，控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor 1001 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs. Memory 1003 is mainly used to store software programs and data. The transceiver 1002 may include a control circuit and an antenna. The control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals. Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
当通信装置开机后，处理器1001可以读取存储器1003中的软件程序，解释并执行软件程序的指令，处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时，处理器1001对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器1001，处理器1001将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the communication device is turned on, the processor 1001 can read the software program in the memory 1003, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor 1001 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1001. The processor 1001 converts the baseband signal into data and performs processing on the data. deal with.
在另一种实现中，所述的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置，例如在分布式场景中，射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置，呈拉远式的布置。In another implementation, the radio frequency circuit and antenna can be arranged independently of the processor that performs baseband processing. For example, in a distributed scenario, the radio frequency circuit and antenna can be arranged remotely and independently of the communication device. .
其中，处理器1001、收发器1002、以及存储器1003可以通过通信总线连接。Among them, the processor 1001, the transceiver 1002, and the memory 1003 can be connected through a communication bus.
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例一中网络设备的功能：处理器1001可以生成图4中步骤S101发送的第一指示信息和第二指示信息，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图4中的步骤S101，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In one design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the first instruction information and the second instruction information sent in step S101 in Figure 4, and/or be used to execute Other processes for the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S101 in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例一中终端设备的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图4中步骤S102，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于接收图4中步骤S101发送的第一指示信息和第二指示信息，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In another design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S102 in Figure 4, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the first indication information and the second indication information sent in step S101 in FIG. 4, and/or other processes for the technology described herein.
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例二中网络设备的功能：处理器1001可以生成图5中步骤S201发送的第一指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S203发送的第二指示信息，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图5中的步骤S201和步骤S203，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In one design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the first instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S201 in Figure 5 and the second instruction information sent in step S203. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S201 and step S203 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例二中终端设备的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图5中步骤S202和步骤S204，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于接收图5中步骤S201发送的第一指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S203发送的第二指示信息，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In another design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S202 and step S204 in Figure 5, and/or be used to perform the technology described herein. Other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the first indication information and the third indication information sent in step S201 in FIG. 5 and the second indication information sent in step S203, and/or other processes for the technology described herein .
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例三中网络设备的功能：处理器1001可以生成图6中步骤S301发送的第四指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S303发送的第一指示信息，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图6中的步骤S301和步骤S303，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In one design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the third embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S301 in Figure 6 and the first instruction information sent in step S303. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S301 and step S303 in FIG. 6, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例三中终端设备的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图6中步骤S302和步骤S304，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于接收图6中步骤S301发送的第四指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S303发送的第一指示信息，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In another design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the third embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S302 and step S304 in Figure 6, and/or be used to perform the technology described herein. Other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fourth indication information and the third indication information sent in step S301 in Figure 6 and the first indication information sent in step S303, and/or other processes for the technology described herein .
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例四中网络设备的功能：处理器1001可以生成图7中步骤S401发送的第五指示信息和第二指示信息，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图7中的步骤S401，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In one design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the fourth embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information sent in step S401 in Figure 7, and/or be used to execute Other processes for the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S401 in FIG. 7, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例四中终端设备的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图7中步骤S402，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于接收图7中步骤S401发送的第五指示信息和第二指示信息，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In another design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the fourth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S402 in Figure 7, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fifth indication information and the second indication information sent in step S401 in FIG. 7, and/or other processes for the technology described herein.
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例五中网络设备的功能：处理器1001可以生成图8中步骤S501发送的第五指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S503发送的第二指示信息，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图8中的步骤S501和步骤S503，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In one design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the network device in the fifth embodiment: the processor 1001 can generate the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information sent in step S501 in Figure 8 and the second instruction information sent in step S503. Instruction information, and/or other processes for performing the techniques described herein; the transceiver 1002 may be configured to perform step S501 and step S503 in FIG. 8, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例五中终端设备的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图8中步骤S502，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于接收图8中步骤S501发送的第五指示信息和第三指示信息以及步骤S503发送的第二指示信息，和/或用于本文所描述的 技术的其它过程。In another design, the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the fifth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S502 in Figure 8, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein. ; The transceiver 1002 may be used to receive the fifth indication information and the third indication information sent in step S501 in Figure 8 and the second indication information sent in step S503, and/or for the methods described herein Other processes of technology.
在上述任一种设计中，处理器1001中可以包括用于实现接收和发送功能的收发器。例如该收发器可以是收发电路，或者是接口，或者是接口电路。用于实现接收和发送功能的收发电路、接口或接口电路可以是分开的，也可以集成在一起。上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于代码/数据的读写，或者，上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于信号的传输或传递。In any of the above designs, the processor 1001 may include a transceiver for implementing receiving and transmitting functions. For example, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an interface, or an interface circuit. The transceiver circuits, interfaces or interface circuits used to implement the receiving and transmitting functions can be separate or integrated together. The above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for reading and writing codes/data, or the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for signal transmission or transfer.
在上述任一种设计中，处理器1001可以存有指令，该指令可为计算机程序，计算机程序在处理器1001上运行，可使得通信装置1000执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。计算机程序可能固化在处理器1001中，该种情况下，处理器1001可能由硬件实现。In any of the above designs, the processor 1001 may store instructions, which may be computer programs. The computer programs run on the processor 1001 and may cause the communication device 1000 to execute the method described in the above method embodiments. The computer program may be solidified in the processor 1001, in which case the processor 1001 may be implemented by hardware.
在一种实现方式中，通信装置1000可以包括电路，所述电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。本申请中描述的处理器和收发器可实现在集成电路(integrated circuit，IC)、模拟IC、无线射频集成电路(radio frequency integrated circuit，RFIC)、混合信号IC、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、印刷电路板(printed circuit board，PCB)、电子设备等上。该处理器和收发器也可以用各种IC工艺技术来制造，例如互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal oxide semiconductor，CMOS)、N型金属氧化物半导体(nMetal-oxide-semiconductor，NMOS)、P型金属氧化物半导体(positive channel metal oxide semiconductor，PMOS)、双极结型晶体管(bipolar junction transistor，BJT)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。In one implementation, the communication device 1000 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments. The processor and transceiver described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuits (ICs), analog ICs, radio frequency integrated circuits (RFICs), mixed-signal ICs, application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits) , ASIC), printed circuit board (PCB), electronic equipment, etc. The processor and transceiver can also be manufactured using various IC process technologies, such as complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), n-type metal oxide-semiconductor (NMOS), P-type Metal oxide semiconductor (positive channel metal oxide semiconductor, PMOS), bipolar junction transistor (BJT), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
本申请中描述的通信装置的范围并不限于此，而且通信装置的结构可以不受图10的限制。通信装置可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。例如所述通信装置可以是：The scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited thereto, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by FIG. 10 . The communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device. For example, the communication device may be:
(1)独立的集成电路IC，或芯片，或，芯片***或子***；(1) Independent integrated circuit IC, or chip, or chip system or subsystem;
(2)具有一个或多个IC的集合，可选的，该IC集合也可以包括用于存储数据，计算机程序的存储部件；(2) A collection of one or more ICs. Optionally, the IC collection may also include storage components for storing data and computer programs;
(3)ASIC，例如调制解调器(Modem)；(3)ASIC, such as modem;
(4)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块；(4) Modules that can be embedded in other devices;
(5)接收机、终端、智能终端、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、移动单元、车载设备、网络设备、云设备、人工智能设备等等；(5) Receivers, terminals, smart terminals, cellular phones, wireless devices, handheld devices, mobile units, vehicle-mounted equipment, network equipment, cloud equipment, artificial intelligence equipment, etc.;
(6)其他等等。(6) Others, etc.
在另一种可能的实现方式中，图9所示的通信装置中，处理单元20可以是一个或多个逻辑电路，收发单元10可以是输入输出接口，又或者称为通信接口，或者接口电路，或接口等等。或者收发单元10还可以是发送单元和接收单元，发送单元可以是输出接口，接收单元可以是输入接口，该发送单元和接收单元集成于一个单元，例如输入输出接口。参见图11，图11是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一结构示意图。如图11所示，图11所示的通信装置包括逻辑电路901和接口902。即上述处理单元20可以用逻辑电路901实现，收发单元10可以用接口902实现。其中，该逻辑电路901可以为芯片、处理电路、集成电路或片上***(system on chip，SoC)芯片等，接口902可以为通信接口、输入输出接口、管脚等。示例性的，图11是以上述通信装置为芯片为例示出的，该芯片包括逻辑电路901和接口902。In another possible implementation, in the communication device shown in FIG. 9 , the processing unit 20 may be one or more logic circuits, and the transceiver unit 10 may be an input-output interface, also known as a communication interface, or an interface circuit. , or interface, etc. Alternatively, the transceiver unit 10 may also be a sending unit and a receiving unit. The sending unit may be an output interface, and the receiving unit may be an input interface. The sending unit and the receiving unit may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface. Referring to Figure 11, Figure 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11 , the communication device shown in FIG. 11 includes a logic circuit 901 and an interface 902 . That is, the above-mentioned processing unit 20 can be implemented by the logic circuit 901, and the transceiver unit 10 can be implemented by the interface 902. Among them, the logic circuit 901 can be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc., and the interface 902 can be a communication interface, an input/output interface, a pin, etc. Illustratively, FIG. 11 shows that the above communication device is a chip. The chip includes a logic circuit 901 and an interface 902 .
本申请实施例中，逻辑电路和接口还可以相互耦合。对于逻辑电路和接口的具体连接方式，本申请实施例不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific connection methods of the logic circuits and interfaces.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例一中网络设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，逻辑电路901，用于生成第一指示信息和第二指示信息；接口902，用于输出该第一指示信息和该第二指示信息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the network device in the first embodiment, the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the first indication information and the second indication information; the interface 902 is used to output the The first indication information and the second indication information.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例一中终端设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，接口902，用于输入第一指示信息和第二指示信息；逻辑电路901，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个组合中确定一个组合。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the terminal device in the first embodiment, the interface 902 is used to input the first instruction information and the second instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the first instruction information according to the first embodiment. 2. Value indicating information, determining a combination from multiple combinations.
可理解，关于第一指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例二中网络设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，逻辑电路901，用于生成第一指示信息和第三指示信息；接口902，用于输出该第一指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the network device in the second embodiment, the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the first indication information and the third indication information; the interface 902 is used to output the the first instruction information and the third instruction information.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例二中终端设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，接口902，用于输入第一指示信息和第三指示信息；逻辑电路901，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个组合中确定一个组合。 Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the terminal device in the second embodiment, the interface 902 is used to input the first instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the first instruction information and the third instruction information according to the second embodiment. Three indication information, determine a combination from multiple combinations.
可理解，关于第一指示信息和第三指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the first indication information, the third indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例三中网络设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，逻辑电路901，用于生成第四指示信息和第三指示信息；接口902，用于输出该第四指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the network device in the third embodiment, the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fourth instruction information and the third instruction information.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例三中终端设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，接口902，用于输入第四指示信息和第三指示信息；逻辑电路901，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个DMRS端口索引组中确定一个DMRS端口索引组。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the terminal device in the third embodiment, the interface 902 is used to input the fourth instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fourth instruction information according to the third embodiment. Three indication information, determine a DMRS port index group from multiple DMRS port index groups.
可理解，关于第三指示信息和第四指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the third indication information, the fourth indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例四中网络设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，逻辑电路901，用于生成第五指示信息和第二指示信息；接口902，用于输出该第五指示信息和该第二指示信息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the network device in the fourth embodiment, the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fifth instruction information and the second instruction information.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例四中终端设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，接口902，用于输入第五指示信息和第二指示信息；逻辑电路901，用于根据第二指示信息的值，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the terminal device in the fourth embodiment, the interface 902 is used to input the fifth instruction information and the second instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fifth instruction information according to the fourth embodiment. 2. The value of the indication information determines an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
可理解，关于第五指示信息和第二指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the second indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例五中网络设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，逻辑电路901，用于生成第五指示信息和第三指示信息；接口902，用于输出该第五指示信息和该第三指示信息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the network device in the fifth embodiment, the logic circuit 901 is used to generate the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information; the interface 902 is used to output the The fifth instruction information and the third instruction information.
示例性的，当通信装置用于执行前述实施例五中终端设备执行的方法或功能或步骤时，接口902，用于输入第五指示信息和第三指示信息；逻辑电路901，用于根据第三指示信息，从多个SRS资源索引组中确定一个SRS资源索引组。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to perform the method or function or step performed by the terminal device in the fifth embodiment, the interface 902 is used to input the fifth instruction information and the third instruction information; the logic circuit 901 is used to input the fifth instruction information according to the fifth embodiment. Three indication information, determine an SRS resource index group from multiple SRS resource index groups.
可理解，关于第五指示信息和第三指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例，这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that for specific descriptions of the fifth indication information, the third indication information, etc., reference may be made to the method embodiments shown above, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解，本申请实施例示出的通信装置可以采用硬件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法，也可以采用软件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法等，本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the communication device shown in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware to implement the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, or can be implemented in the form of software to implement the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
对于图11所示的各个实施例的具体实现方式，还可以参考上述各个实施例，这里不再详述。For the specific implementation of each embodiment shown in Figure 11, reference may also be made to the above-mentioned embodiments, which will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种无线通信***，该无线通信***包括网络设备和终端设备，该网络设备和该终端设备可以用于执行前述任一实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system includes a network device and a terminal device. The network device and the terminal device can be used to perform the method in any of the foregoing embodiments.
此外，本申请还提供一种计算机程序，该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由网络设备执行的操作和/或处理。In addition, this application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the network device in the method provided by this application.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序，该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由终端设备执行的操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机代码，当计算机代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请提供的方法中由网络设备执行的操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer code. When the computer code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to perform the operations performed by the network device in the method provided by this application and/or or processing.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机代码，当计算机代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请提供的方法中由终端设备执行的操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer code. When the computer code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to perform the operations performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application and/or or processing.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机代码或计算机程序，当该计算机代码或计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得本申请提供的方法中由网络设备设备执行的操作和/或处理被执行。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer code or computer program. When the computer code or computer program is run on a computer, it causes the operations performed by the network equipment in the method provided by this application and/or or processing is performed.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机代码或计算机程序，当该计算机代码或计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得本申请提供的方法中由终端设备执行的操作和/或处理被执行。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer code or computer program. When the computer code or computer program is run on a computer, it causes the operations performed by the terminal device in the method provided by this application and/or Processing is performed.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的***、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另外，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，也可以是电的，机械的或其它的形式连接。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. In addition, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, or may be electrical, mechanical or other forms of connection.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请实施例提供的方案的技术效果。 The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the technical effects of the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分，或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个可读存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的可读存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a readable The storage medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned readable storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc. that can store program code medium.
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (19)

  1. 一种信息指示方法，其特征在于，包括：An information indicating method, characterized by including:
    网络设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和发送预编码矩阵指示TPMI索引的组合，所述传输层数和所述TPMI索引对应，所述第一指示信息至少有第一值，所述第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，所述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；The network device sends first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the number of transmission layers and the transmission precoding matrix indication TPMI index. The number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information is at least There is a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination;
    所述网络设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引；所述第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，所述多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第一集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第一组合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第二集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第二组合。The network device sends second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets at least include A first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, value in the set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination.
  2. 一种信息指示方法，其特征在于，包括：An information indicating method, characterized by including:
    终端设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和发送预编码矩阵指示TPMI索引的组合，所述传输层数和所述TPMI索引对应，所述第一指示信息至少有第一值，所述第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，所述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；The terminal device receives first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of a transmission layer number and a transmit precoding matrix indication TPMI index. The transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information is at least There is a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination;
    所述终端设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引；所述第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，所述多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第一集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第一组合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第二集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第二组合；The terminal device receives second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets at least include A first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, value in the set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination;
    所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息的值，从所述多个组合中确定一个组合。The terminal device determines a combination from the plurality of combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一组合中的传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5, One of 6, 7, or 8.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一组合中的传输层数为1时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5；The method according to claim 3, characterized in that when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为2时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为6；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为3时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为7；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为4时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为8。When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一组合中的传输层数为1时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为8；The method according to claim 3, characterized in that when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为2时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为7；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为3时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为6；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为4时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5。When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息均携带于下行控制信息中。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that both the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in downlink control information.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息为下行控制信息中的预编码信息和层数字段，所述第二指示信息为下行控制信息中的天线端口字段。The method according to any one of claims 1-6, characterized in that the first indication information is the precoding information and layer number field in the downlink control information, and the second indication information is the precoding information and the layer number field in the downlink control information. Antenna port field.
  8. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    收发单元，用于发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和TPMI索引的组合，所述传输层数和所述TPMI索引对应，所述第一指示信息至少有第一值，所述第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，所述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；A transceiver unit configured to send first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of a transmission layer number and a TPMI index. The transmission layer number corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information has at least a third A value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination;
    所述收发单元，用于发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示DMRS端口索引；所述第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，所述多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第一集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第一组合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第二集合中的 值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第二组合。The transceiver unit is configured to send second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of multiple sets, and the multiple sets include at least the first A set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is a value in the second set, middle value, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination.
  9. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    收发单元，用于接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示传输层数和发送预编码矩阵指示TPMI索引的组合，所述传输层数和所述TPMI索引对应，所述第一指示信息至少有第一值，所述第一值指示传输层数和TPMI索引的多个组合，所述多个组合包括第一组合和第二组合；A transceiver unit, configured to receive first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate a combination of the number of transmission layers and the transmission precoding matrix indication TPMI index. The number of transmission layers corresponds to the TPMI index. The first indication information is The indication information has at least a first value, the first value indicates multiple combinations of the transport layer number and the TPMI index, and the multiple combinations include a first combination and a second combination;
    所述收发单元，还用于接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示解调参考信号DMRS端口索引；所述第二指示信息的值属于多个集合中的一个，所述多个集合至少包括第一集合和第二集合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第一集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第一组合，当所述第二指示信息为所述第二集合中的值时，所述DMRS端口索引关联所述第二组合；The transceiver unit is also configured to receive second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal DMRS port index; the value of the second indication information belongs to one of a plurality of sets, and the plurality of A set at least includes a first set and a second set. When the second indication information is a value in the first set, the DMRS port index is associated with the first combination. When the second indication information is When the value in the second set is equal to the value in the second set, the DMRS port index is associated with the second combination;
    处理单元，用于根据所述第二指示信息的值，从所述多个组合中确定一个组合。A processing unit configured to determine a combination from the plurality of combinations according to the value of the second indication information.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一组合中的传输层数为1、2、3、4中的一个，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5、6、7、8中的一个。The device according to claim 8 or 9, characterized in that the number of transmission layers in the first combination is one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5, One of 6, 7, or 8.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一组合中的传输层数为1时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5；The device according to claim 10, characterized in that when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为2时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为6；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为3时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为7；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为4时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为8。When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8.
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一组合中的传输层数为1时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为8；The device according to claim 10, characterized in that when the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 1, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 8;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为2时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为7；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 2, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 7;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为3时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为6；When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 3, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 6;
    当所述第一组合中的传输层数为4时，所述第二组合中的传输层数为5。When the number of transmission layers in the first combination is 4, the number of transmission layers in the second combination is 5.
  13. 根据权利要求8-12中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息均携带于下行控制信息中。The device according to any one of claims 8-12, characterized in that both the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in downlink control information.
  14. 根据权利要求8-13中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息为下行控制信息中的预编码信息和层数字段，所述第二指示信息为下行控制信息中的天线端口字段。The device according to any one of claims 8-13, characterized in that the first indication information is the precoding information and the layer number field in the downlink control information, and the second indication information is the precoding information and the layer number field in the downlink control information. Antenna port field.
  15. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器、收发器以及存储器；所述收发器用于收发信息；A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor, a transceiver and a memory; the transceiver is used to send and receive information;
    所述存储器用于存储指令；The memory is used to store instructions;
    所述处理器用于执行所述指令，以使权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法被执行。The processor is configured to execute the instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 1 to 7 is executed.
  16. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括逻辑电路和接口，所述逻辑电路和接口耦合；A communication device, characterized in that it includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit and the interface are coupled;
    所述接口用于输入和/或输出代码指令，所述逻辑电路用于执行所述代码指令，以使权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法被执行。The interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 1 to 7 is executed.
  17. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被执行时，权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method described in any one of claims 1 to 7 is executed.
  18. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于执行权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, the processor being configured to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  19. 一种计算机程序，其特征在于，所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法被执行。 A computer program, characterized in that when the computer program is run on a computer, the method of any one of claims 1 to 7 is executed.
PCT/CN2023/103385 2022-07-22 2023-06-28 Information indication method and apparatus, and readable storage medium WO2024016977A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210867896.8A CN117478284A (en) 2022-07-22 2022-07-22 Information indication method, device and readable storage medium
CN202210867896.8 2022-07-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024016977A1 true WO2024016977A1 (en) 2024-01-25

Family

ID=89617046

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/103385 WO2024016977A1 (en) 2022-07-22 2023-06-28 Information indication method and apparatus, and readable storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117478284A (en)
WO (1) WO2024016977A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108631831A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 华为技术有限公司 The transmission method and equipment of information
CN111510269A (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-08-07 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
TW202220481A (en) * 2020-10-03 2022-05-16 美商高通公司 Precoding matrix indication for physical uplink shared channel repetitions

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108631831A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 华为技术有限公司 The transmission method and equipment of information
CN111510269A (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-08-07 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
TW202220481A (en) * 2020-10-03 2022-05-16 美商高通公司 Precoding matrix indication for physical uplink shared channel repetitions

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
MODERATOR (SAMSUNG): "Email discussion summary for [94e Bis][12] NR_eMIMO_UE_RF", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG4 MEETING # 94-E-BIS, R4-2005098, 4 May 2020 (2020-05-04), XP051880080 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117478284A (en) 2024-01-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113824481B (en) Uplink transmission method, device, chip system and storage medium
CN111886809B (en) Method and device for selecting uplink antenna
CN106470096B (en) Apparatus and method for base station side and user equipment side for wireless communication
JP7241707B2 (en) DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, DEVICE, NETWORK SIDE DEVICE AND USER DEVICE
CA3042834A1 (en) Communication method, communications apparatus, network device, and terminal
WO2019062681A1 (en) Uplink transmission and configuration method, terminal, and base station
CN110838860B (en) Signal transmission method, device, terminal and network side equipment
US9084274B2 (en) Wireless data transceiving method in multi-point transmission environment
JP6690652B2 (en) Electronic device and wireless communication method in wireless communication system
US10652066B2 (en) Device, method, and program for identifying a preferred codebook for non-orthogonal multiplexing/non-orthogonal multiple access
JP7342869B2 (en) Electronic equipment, wireless communication methods and computer-readable recording media
US10477555B2 (en) Device and method for non-orthogonal multiplexing
JP2019512920A (en) Electric apparatus and communication method used for communication apparatus having a plurality of antennas
JP7452540B2 (en) Electronic equipment, communication methods, and storage media
WO2023060449A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2024016977A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus, and readable storage medium
WO2022227041A1 (en) Uplink transmission methods, terminal devices and network devices
EP3361660A1 (en) Mapping configuration
JP2023538918A (en) How to share SRS resources between sets of SRS resources for different uses
WO2024032264A1 (en) Precoding indication method and communication apparatus
WO2024002195A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2022002130A1 (en) Stream processing method and apparatus thereof
WO2024011579A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024016118A1 (en) Communication system, terminal device, and network device
WO2023159575A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23842042

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1